Gd300 user manual v1.1

Goodrive300 inverters Preface
1
Preface
Thanks for choosing our products.
Goodrive300 series inverters are high performance open loop vector inverters for controlling
asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors. Applying
the most advanced non-velocity sensor vector control technology which keeps pace with the
leading international technology and DSP control system, our products enhances its
reliability to meet the adaptability to the environment, customized and industrialized design
with more optimized functions, more flexible application and more stable performance.
The control performance of Goodrive300 series inverters is as outstanding as that of the
leading sophisticated inverters on worldwide market. Goodrive300 series inverters integrate
the drive of asynchronous motors and synchronous motors, torque control and speed control,
meeting the high performance requirement of the customer applications and stepping on the
unique incorporated inverters with superexcellent control functions in this circle.
Simultaneously, comparing with the other kinds, Goodrive300 series inverters can adapt to
worse grid, temperature, humidity and dust with a better performance of anti-tripping and
improved the reliability.
Goodrive300 series inverters apply modularized design to meet the specific demand of
customers, as well as the demand of the whole industry flexibly and follow the trend of
industrial application to the inverters on the premise of meeting general need of the market.
Powerful speed control, torque control, simple PLC, flexible input/output terminals, pulse
frequency given, traverse control can realize various complicate high-accuracy drives and
provide integrative solution for the manufacturers of industrial devices, which contributes a
lot to the cost reducing and improves reliability.
Goodrive300 series inverters can meet the demand of environmental protection which
focuses on low noise and weakening electromagnetic interference in the application sites for
the customers.
This manual provides installation and configuration, parameters setting, fault diagnoses and
daily maintenance and relative precautions to customers. Please read this manual carefully
before the installation to ensure a proper installation and operation and high performance of
Goodrive300 series inverters.
If the product is ultimately used for military affairs or manufacture of weapon, it will be listed
on the export control formulated by Foreign Trade Law of the People's Republic of China.
Rigorous review and necessary export formalities are needed when exported.
Our company reserves the right to update the information of our products.

Goodrive300 inverters Content
2
Content
Preface...................................................................................................................................1
Content...................................................................................................................................2
Safety Precautions 1........................................................................6
1.1 What this chapter contains .....................................................................................6
1.2 Safety definition......................................................................................................6
1.3 Warning symbols....................................................................................................6
1.4 Safety guidelines....................................................................................................7
Quick Start-up 2 .........................................................11
2.1 What this chapter contains ...................................................................................11
2.2 Unpacking inspection ...........................................................................................11
2.3 Application confirmation .......................................................................................11
2.4 Environment.........................................................................................................12
2.5 Installation confirmation........................................................................................12
2.6 Basic commission.................................................................................................13
Product Overview 3 ....................................................................14
3.2 Basic principles ....................................................................................................14
3.3 Product specification ............................................................................................15
3.4 Nameplate............................................................................................................17
3.5 Type designation key............................................................................................17
3.6 Rated specifications .............................................................................................18
3.7 Structure diagram.................................................................................................19
Installation Guidelines 4..........................................................................21
4.2 Mechanical installation .........................................................................................21
4.3 Standard wiring.....................................................................................................27
4.4 Layout protection..................................................................................................36
Keypad Operation Procedure 5 ................................................................................38
5.2 Keypad .................................................................................................................38

3
5.3 Keypad displaying ................................................................................................41
5.4 Keypad operation .................................................................................................42
Function Parameters 6...................................................................45
6.2 Goodrive300 general series function parameters.................................................45
Basic Operation Instruction 7 .....................................................................140
7.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................140
7.2 First powering on................................................................................................140
7.3 Vector control .....................................................................................................145
7.4 V/F control..........................................................................................................150
7.5 Torque control.....................................................................................................156
7.6 Parmeters of the motor.......................................................................................161
7.7 Start-up and stop control ....................................................................................167
7.8 Frequency setting...............................................................................................171
7.9 Analog input .......................................................................................................177
7.10 Analog output ...................................................................................................179
7.11 Digital input.......................................................................................................182
7.12 Digital input.......................................................................................................191
7.13 Simple PLC ......................................................................................................194
7.14 Multi-stage speed running ................................................................................197
7.15 PID control .......................................................................................................199
7.16 Traverse running ..............................................................................................203
7.17 Pulse counter ...................................................................................................205
7.18 Fixed-length control..........................................................................................206
7.19 Fault procedure ................................................................................................207
Fault tracking 8 ..............................................................211
8.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................211
8.2 Alarm and fault indications .................................................................................211
8.3 How to reset.......................................................................................................211
8.4 Fault history........................................................................................................211
8.5 Fault instruction and solution..............................................................................211

4
8.6 Common fault analysis.......................................................................................218
8.6.1 The motor does not work.................................................................................218
8.6.2 Motor vibration.................................................................................................219
8.6.3 Overvoltage.....................................................................................................220
8.6.4 Undervoltage fault ...........................................................................................220
8.6.5 Abnormal heating of the motor ........................................................................221
8.6.6 Overheat of the inverter...................................................................................222
8.6.7 Speed loss during the acceleration of the motor .............................................222
8.6.8 Overcurrent .....................................................................................................223
Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9 ................................................................224
9.1 What this chapter contains. ................................................................................224
9.2 Maintenance intervals ........................................................................................224
9.3 Cooling fan.........................................................................................................228
9.4 Capacitors ..........................................................................................................228
9.5 Power cable .......................................................................................................230
Communication protocol 10 .........................................................................231
10.1 What this chapter contains ...............................................................................231
10.2 Brief instruction to Modbus protocol .................................................................231
10.3 Application of the inverter.................................................................................232
10.4 RTU command code and communication data illustration................................238
Common communication fault..................................................................................251
Extension card Appendix A.....................................................252
A.1 What this chapter contains.................................................................................252
A.2 Profibus extension card .....................................................................................252
Technical data Appendix B....................................................271
B.1 What this chapter contains.................................................................................271
B.2 Ratings...............................................................................................................271
B.3 Electric power network specification ..................................................................272
B.4 Motor connection data .......................................................................................273
B.5 Applicable standards..........................................................................................273
B.6 EMC regulations ................................................................................................274

5
Dimension drawings Appendix C.....................................................276
C.1 What this chapter contains.................................................................................276
C.2 Keypad structure................................................................................................276
C.3 Inverter chart......................................................................................................277
C.4 Inverter chart......................................................................................................277
Peripherial options and parts Appendix D......................................................281
D.1 What this chapter contains What this chapter contain .......................................281
D.2 Peripherial wiring ...............................................................................................281
D.3 Power supply .....................................................................................................282
D.4 Cables ...............................................................................................................283
D.5 Breaker and electromagnetic contactor .............................................................286
D.6 Reactors ............................................................................................................288
D.7 Filter...................................................................................................................289
D.8 Braking system ..................................................................................................291
Further information Appendix E .....................................................295

Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions
6
Safety Precautions 1
1.1 What this chapter contains
Please read this manual carefully and follow all safety precautions before moving, installing,
operating and servicing the inverter. If ignored, physical injury or death may occur, or
damage may occur to the devices.
If any physical injury or death or damage to the devices occurs for ignoring to the safety
precautions in the manual, our company will not be responsible for any damages and we are
not legally bound in any manner.
1.2 Safety definition
Danger: Serious physical injury or even death may occur if not follow
relevent requirements
Warning: Physical injury or damage to the devices may occur if not follow
relevent requirements
Note: Physical hurt may occur if not follow relevent requirements
Qualified
electricians:
People working on the device should take part in professional
electrical and safety training, receive the certification and be
familiar with all steps and requirements of installing,
commissioning, operating and maintaining the device to avoid any
emergency.
1.3 Warning symbols
Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and/or
damage to the equipment, and advice on how to avoid the danger. Following warning
symbols are used in this manual:
Symbols Name Instruction Abbreviation
Danger
Electrical
Danger
Serious physical injury or even
death may occur if not follow the
relative requirements
Warning
General
danger
Physical injury or damage to the
devices may occur if not follow the
relative requirements

7
Symbols Name Instruction Abbreviation
Do not
Electrostatic
discharge
Damage to the PCBA board may
occur if not follow the relative
requirements
Hot sides
Hot sides
Sides of the device may become
hot. Do not touch.
Note Note
Physical hurt may occur if not follow
the relative requirements
Note
1.4 Safety guidelines
²Only qualified electricians are allowed to operate on the inverter.
²Do not carry out any wiring and inspection or changing components when the
power supply is applied. Ensure all input power supply is disconnected
before wiring and checking and always wait for at least the time designated
on the inverter or until the DC bus voltage is less than 36V. Below is the table
of the waiting time:
Inverter module Minimum waiting time
400V 1.5kW-110kW 5 minutes
400V 132 kW -315 kW 15 minutes
400V above 350 kW 25 minutes
²Do not refit the inverter unauthorizedly; otherwise fire, electric shock or other
injury may occur.
²The base of the radiator may become hot during running. Do not touch to
avoid hurt.
²The electrical parts and components inside the inverter are electrostatic.
Take measurements to avoid electrostatic discharge during relevent
operation.
1.4.1 Delivery and installation
² Please install the inverter on fire-retardant material and keep the inverter
away from combustible materials.
² Connect the braking optional parts (braking resistors, braking units or
feedback units) according to the wiring diagram.
² Do not operate on the inverter if there is any damage or components loss to

8
the inverter.
² Do not touch the inverter with wet items or body, otherwise electric shock
may occur.
Note:
² Select appropriate moving and installing tools to ensure a safe and normal running of
the inverter and avoid physical injury or death. For physical safety, the erector should
take some mechanical protective measurements, such as wearing exposure shoes
and working uniforms.
² Ensure to avoid physical shock or vibration during delivery and installation.
² Do not carry the inverter by its cover. The cover may fall off.
² Install away from children and other public places.
² The inverter cannot meet the requirements of low voltage protection in IEC61800-5-1
if the sea level of installation site is above 2000m.
² Please use the inverter on appropriate condition (See chapter Installation
Environment).
² Don't allow screws, cables and other conductive items to fall inside the inverter.
² The leakage current of the inverter may be above 3.5mA during operation. Ground
with proper techniques and ensure the grounding resistor is less than 10Ω. The
conductivity of PE grounding conductor is the same as that of the phase conductor
(with the same cross sectional area).
² R, S and T are the input terminals of the power supply, while U, V and W are the motor
terminals. Please connect the input power cables and motor cables with proper
techniques; otherwise the damage to the inverter may occur.
1.4.2 Commission and running
² Disconnect all power supplies applied to the inverter before the terminal
wiring and wait for at least the designated time after disconnecting the
power supply.
² High voltage is present inside the inverter during running. Do not carry
out any operation except for the keypad setting.
² The inverter may start up by itself when P01.21=1. Do not get close to
the inverter and motor.
² The inverter can not be used as “Emergency-stop device”.
² The inverter can not be used to break the motor suddenly. A mechanical

9
braking device should be provided.
² Besides the above items, check to ensure the following ones before the
installation and maintenance during the running of the permanent
synchronization motor:
1. All input power supply is disconnected (including the main power
supply and the control power supply).
2. The permanent magnet synchronization motor has stopped
running and measured to ensure the output voltage of the inverter
is less than 36V.
3. The waiting time of the permanent magnet synchronization motor
after stopping is no less than the time designated and measure to
ensure the voltage between + and – is less than 36V.
4. Ensure the permanent magnet synchronization motor does not
rotate again because of the external load. It is recommended to
install effectively external braking devices or disconnect the electric
wiring between the motor and the inverter directly.
Note:
² Do not switch on or off the input power supply of the inverter frequently.
² For inverters that have been stored for a long time, check and fix the capacitance and
try to run it again before utilization (see Maintenance and Hardware Fault
Diagnose).
² Cover the front board before running, otherwise electric shock may occur.
1.4.3 Maintenance and replacement of components
² Only qualified electricians are allowed to perform the maintenance,
inspection, and components replacement of the inverter.
² Disconnect all power supplies to the inverter before the terminal wiring.
Wait for at least the time designated on the inverter after disconnection.
² Take measures to avoid screws, cables and other conductive matters to
fall into the inverter during maintenance and component replacement.
Note:
² Please select proper torque to tighten screws.
² Keep the inverter, parts and components away from combustible materials during
maintenance and component replacement.

10
² Do not carry out any isolation and pressure test on the inverter and do not measure
the control circuit of the inverter by megameter.
² Carry out a sound anti-electrostatic protection to the inverter and its internal
components during maintenance and component replacement.
1.4.4 What to do after scrapping
² There are heavy metals in the inverter. Deal with it as industrial effluent.

Goodrive300 inverters Quick start-up
11
Quick Start-up 2
This chapter mainly describes the basic guidelines during the installation and commission
procedures on the inverter, which you may follow to install and commission the inverter
quickly.
2.2 Unpacking inspection
Check as followings after receiving products:
1. Check that there are no damage and humidification to the package. If not, please contact
with local agents or INVT offices.
2. Check the information on the type designation label on the outside of the package to
verify that the drive is of the correct type. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT
offices.
3. Check that there are no signs of water in the package and no signs of damage or breach
to the inverter. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices.
4. Check the information on the type designation label on the outside of the package to
verify that the name plate is of the correct type. If not, please contact with local dealers or
INVT offices.
5. Check to ensure the accessories (including user’s manual, control keypad and extension
card) inside the device is complete. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices.
2.3 Application confirmation
Check the machine before beginning to use the inverter:
1. Check the load type to verify that there is no overload of the inverter during work and
check that whether the drive needs to modify the power degree.
2. Check that the actual current of the motor is less than the rated current of the inverter.
3. Check that the control accuracy of the load is the same of the inverter.
4. Check that the incoming supply voltage is correspondent to the rated voltage of the
inverter.
5. Check that the communication needs option card or not.

12
2.4 Environment
Check as followings before the actual installation and usage:
1. Check that the ambient temperature of the inverter is below 40 . If exceeds, derate℃ 3%
for every additional 1 .℃ Additionally, the inverter can not be used if the ambient
temperature is above 50℃.
Note: for the cabinet inverter, the ambient temperature means the air temperature inside
the cabinet.
2. Check that the ambient temperature of the inverter in actual usage is above -10℃. If not,
add heating facilities.
Note: for the cabinet inverter, the ambient temperature means the air temperature inside
the cabinet.
3. Check that the altitude of the actual usage site is below 1000m. If exceeds, derate1% for
every additional 100m.
4. Check that the humidity of the actual usage site is below 90% and condensation is not
allowed. If not, add additional protection inverters.
5. Check that the actual usage site is away from direct sunlight and foreign objects can not
enter the inverter. If not, add additional protective measures.
6. Check that there is no conductive dust or flammable gas in the actual usage site. If not,
add additional protection to inverters.
2.5 Installation confirmation
Check as followings after the installation:
1. Check that the load range of the input and output cables meet the need of actual load.
2. Check that the accessories of the inverter are correctly and properly installed. The
installation cables should meet the needs of every component (including reactors, input
filters, output reactors, output filters, DC reactors, braking units and braking resistors).
3. Check that the inverter is installed on non-flammable materials and the calorific
accessories (reactors and brake resistors) are away from flammable materials.
4. Check that all control cables and power cables are run separately and the routation
complies with EMC requirement.
5. Check that all grounding systems are properly grounded according to the requirements
of the inverter.
6. Check that the free space during installation is sufficient according to the instructions in
user’s manual.

13
7. Check that the installation conforms to the instructions in user’s manual. The drive must
be installed in an upright position.
8. Check that the external connection terminals are tightly fastened and the torque is
appropriate.
9. Check that there are no screws, cables and other conductive items left in the inverter. If
not, get them out.
2.6 Basic commission
Complete the basic commissioning as followings before actual utilization:
1. Select the motor type, set correct motor parameters and select control mode of the
inverter according to the actual motor parameters.
2. Autotune. If possible, de-coupled from the motor load to start dynamic autotune. Or if not,
static autotune is available.
3. Adjust the ACC/DEC time according to the actual running of the load.
4. Commission the device via jogging and check that the rotation direction is as required. If
not, change the rotation direction by changing the wiring of motor.
5. Set all control parameters and then operate.

Goodrive300 inverters Product overview
14
Product Overview 3
The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, product characteristics, layout, name
plate and type designation information.
3.2 Basic principles
Goodrive300 series inverters are wall or flange mountable devices for controlling
asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors.
The diagram below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the inverter. The rectifier
converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the intermediate
circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The converter transforms the DC voltage back to AC
voltage for the AC motor. The brake pipe connects the external braking resistor to the
intermediate DC circuit to consume the feedback energy when the voltage in the circuit
exceeds its maximum limit.
Diagram 3-1 The simplified main circuit diagram (above 37kW (including 37kW))
Diagram 3-2 The simplified main circuit diagram (below 30kW (including 30kW))

15
Note:
1. The inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) supports external DC reactor which is an
optional part. Before connecting, it is necessary to remove the copper row between P1 and
（+）.
2. The inverter below 30kW (including 30kW) supports external braking resistor; the inverter
above 37kW (including 37kW) supports external braking units. Both the braking unit and the
braking resistor are optional parts.
3.3 Product specification
Function Specification
Power
input
Input voltage (V)
AC 3PH 400V±15%
AC 3PH 220V±10%
AC 3PH 660V±10%
Input current (A) Refer to the rated value
Input frequency (Hz)
50Hz or 60Hz
Allowed range: 47~63Hz
Power
output
Output voltage (V) 0~input voltage
Output current (A) Refer to the rated value
Output power (kW) Refer to the rated value
Output frequency
(Hz)
0~400Hz
Technical
control
feature
Control mode V/F, sensorless vector control
Motor type
Asynchronous motor and permanent magnet
synchronous motor
Adjustable-speed
ratio
Asynchronous motor 1:200 (SVC) synchronous
motor 1:20 (SVC)
Speed control
accuracy
±0.2% (sensorless vector control)
Speed fluctuation ± 0.3%(sensorless vector control)
Torque response <20ms(sensorless vector control)
Torque control
accuracy
10%(sensorless vector control)
Starting torque
Asynchronous motor: 0.25Hz/150%(sensorless
vector control)

16
Synchronous motor: 2.5 Hz/150%(sensorless vector
control)
Overload capability
150% of rated current: 1 minute
180% of rated current: 10 seconds
200% of rated current: 1 second
Running
control
feature
Frequency setting
method
Digital setting, analog setting, pulse frequency
setting, multi-stage speed running setting, simple
PLC setting, PID setting, MODBUS communication
setting, PROFIBUS communication setting.
Realize the shifting between the set combination
and set channel.
Auto-adjustment of
the voltage
Keep a stable voltage automatically when the grid
voltage transients
Fault protection
Provide over 30 fault protection functions:
overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, overheating,
phase loss and overload, etc.
Restart after rotating
speed tracking
Realize the smooth starting of the rotating motor
Peripheral
interface
Terminal analog input
resolution
Not above 20mV
Terminal switch input
resolution
Not above 2ms
Analog input
2 channels (AI1, AI2) 0~10V/0~20mA and 1 channel
(AI3) -10~10V
Analog output 2 channels (AO1, AO2) 0~10V /0~20mA
Digital input
8 channels common input, the Max. frequency:
1kHz, internal impedance: 3.3kΩ;
1 channel high speed input, the Max. frequency:
50kHz
Digital output
1 channel high speed pulse output, the Max.
frequency: 50kHz;
1 channel Y terminal open collector pole output

17
Relay output
2 channels programmable relay output
RO1A NO, RO1B NC, RO1C common terminal
RO2A NO, RO2B NC, RO2C common terminal
Contactor capability: 3A/AC250V,1A/DC30V
Others
Mountable method Wall mountable and flange mountable
Temperature of the
running environment
-10~50℃, derate above 40℃
Average non-fault
time
2 years (25℃ ambient temperature)
Protective degree IP20
Cooling Air-cooling
Braking unit
Built in braking unit for below 30kW (including
30kW)
External braking unit for others
EMC filter
Built-in C3 filter: meet the degree requirement of
IEC61800-3 C3
External filter:meet the degree requirement of
IEC61800-3 C2
3.4 Nameplate
Fig 3-3 Name plate
3.5 Type designation key
The type designation contains information on the inverter. The user can find the type
designation on the type designation label attached to the inverter or the simple name plate.

18
GD300 – 5R5G – 4
① ② ③
Fig 3-4 Product type
Field
identification
Sign
Detailed
description of the
sign
Detailed content
Abbreviation ①
Product
abbreviation
Goodrive300 is shorted for GD300.
Rated power ②
Power range +
Load type
5R5-5.5kW
G—Constant torque load
Voltage
degree
③ Voltage degree 4—400V
3.6 Rated specifications
The inverter
Constant torque
Rated
output power（kW）
Rated input
current（A）
Rated output
current（A）
GD300-1R5G-4 1.5 5.0 3.7
GD300-2R2G-4 2.2 5.8 5
GD300-004G-4 4 13.5 9.5
GD300-5R5G-4 5.5 19.5 14
GD300-7R5G-4 7.5 25 18.5
GD300-011G-4 11 32 25
GD300-015G/-4 15 40 32
GD300-018G-4 18.5 47 38
GD300-022G-4 22 56 45
GD300-030G-4 30 70 60
GD300-037G-4 37 80 75
GD300-045G-4 45 94 92
GD300-055G-4 55 128 115
GD300-075G-4 75 160 150
GD300-090G-4 90 190 180

19
The inverter
Constant torque
Rated
output power（kW）
Rated input
current（A）
Rated output
current（A）
GD300-110G-4 110 225 215
GD300-132G-4 132 265 260
GD300-160G-4 160 310 305
GD300-200G-4 200 385 380
GD300-220G-4 220 430 425
GD300-250G-4 250 460 480
GD300-280G-4 280 500 530
GD300-315G-4 315 580 600
GD300-350G-4 350 620 650
GD300-400G-4 400 670 720
GD300-500G-4 500 835 860
3.7 Structure diagram
Below is the layout figure of the inverter (take the inverter of 30kW as the example).
4
6
7
1
2
3
14
13
9
10
11
12
8
5
Fig 3-5 Product structure diagram

20
Serial
No.
Name Illustration
1 Keypad connections Connect the keypad
2 Upper cover Protect the internal parts and components
3 Keypad
See Keypad Operation Procedure for detailed
information
4 Cooling fan
See Maintenance and Hardware Fault Diagnose for
detailed information
5 Cardboard
The cardboard, with installation holes, is the same as
the behind cover of the machine and, so it is
convenient for the installation.
6
Wire arrangement
interface
Connect to the control board and the drive board
7 Name plate See Product Overview for detailed information
8 Side cover
Optional part. The side cover will increase the
protective degree of the inverter. The internal
temperature of the inverter will increase, too, so it is
necessary to derate the inverter at the same time
9 Control terminals See Electric Installation for detailed information
10 Main circuit terminals See Electric Installation for detailed information
11 Main circuit cable entry Fix the main circuit cable
12 POWER light Power indicator
13 Simple name plate See Product Overview for detailed information
14 Lower cover Protect the internal parts and components

Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines
21
Installation Guidelines 4
The chapter describes the mechanical installation and electric installation.
²Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out what described in this
chapter. Please operate as the instructions in Safety Precautions. Ignoring
these may cause physical injury or death or damage to the devices.
²Ensure the power supply of the inverter is disconnected during the operation.
Wait for at least the time designated until the POWER indicator is off after the
disconnection if the power supply is applied. It is recommended to use the
multimeter to monitor that the DC bus voltage of the drive is under 36V.
²The installation and design of the inverter should be complied with the
requirement of the local laws and regulations in the installation site. If the
installation infringes the requirement, our company will exempt from any
responsibility. Additionally, if users do not comply with the suggestion, some
damage beyond the assured maintenance range may occur.
4.2 Mechanical installation
4.2.1 Installation environment
The installation environment is the safeguard for a full performance and long-term stable
functions of the inverter. Check the installation environment as followings:
Environment Conditions
Installation site Indoor
Environment
temperature
-10~+50℃
If the ambient temperature of the inverter is above 40 , derate 3%℃
for every additional 1 .℃
It is not recommended to use the inverter if the ambient
temperature is above 50 .℃
In order to improve the reliability of the device, do not use the
inverter if the ambient temperature changes frequently.
Please provide cooling fan or air conditioner to control the internal
ambient temperature below the required one if the inverter is used

22
Environment Conditions
in a close space such as in the control cabinet.
When the temperature is too low, if the inverter needs to restart to
run after a long stop, it is necessary to provide an external heating
device to increase the internal temperature, otherwise damage to
the devices may occur.
Humidity
RH≤90%
No condensation is allowed.
The maximum relative humility should be equal to or less than
60% in corrosive air.
Storage
temperature
-30~+60℃
Running
environment
condition
The installation site of the inverter should:
keep away from the electromagnetic radiation source;
keep away from contaminative air, such as corrosive gas, oil mist
and flammable gas;
ensure foreign objects, such as metal power, dust, oil, water can
not enter into the inverter(do not install the inverter on the
flammable materials such as wood);
keep away from direct sunlight, oil mist, steam and vibration
environment.
Altitude
Below 1000m
If the sea level is above 1000m, please derate 1% for every
additional 100m.
Vibration ≤ 5.8m/s2
(0.6g)
Installation direction
The inverter should be installed on an upright position to ensure
sufficient cooling effect.
Note:
u Goodrive300 series inverters should be installed in a clean and ventilated
environment according to enclosure classification.
u Cooling air must be clean, free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive
dust.

23
4.2.2 Installation direction
The inverter may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet.
The inverter must be installed in an upright position. Check the installation site according to
the requirements below. Refer to chapter Dimension Drawings in the appendix for frame
details.
Fig 4-1 Installation direction of the inverter
4.2.3 Installation manner
The inverter can be installed in two different ways, depending on the frame size:
a) Wall mounting (for all frame sizes)
b) Flange mounting (for all frame sizes)
Fig 4-2 Installation manner
(1) Mark the hole location. The location of the holes is shown in the dimension drawings in
the appendix.
(2) Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations..
(3) Position the drive onto the wall.
(4) Tighten the screws in the wall securely.

24
4.2.4 Single installation
Fig 4-3 Single installation
Note:The minimum space of B and C is 100mm.
4.2.5 Multiple installations
Parallel installation
Fig 4-4 Parallel installation
Note:
u Before installing the different sizes inverters, please align their top position for the
convenience of later maintenance.
u The minimum space of B, D and C is 100mm.

25
4.2.6 Vertical installation
Fig 4-5 Vertical installation
Note: Windscreen should be added in Vertical installation for avoiding mutual impact and
insufficient cooling.

26
4.2.7 Tilt installation
Fig 4-6 Tilt installation
Note: Ensure the separation of the wind input and output channels in tilt installation for
avoiding mutual impact.

27
4.3 Standard wiring
4.3.1 Connection diagram of main circuit
R
S
T
W
V
U
PE
M
含及以下30kW ( )
(+) PB
三相电源
380V±15%
50/60Hz
制动电阻
输入
电抗器
输入
滤波器
熔断器
A1
A2单相 220V选配
输出
电抗器
输出
滤波器
(-)
R
S
T
W
V
U
PE
M
37kW（含）及以上
P1 (+)
直流电抗器
三相电源
380V±15%
50/60Hz
(-)
输入
电抗器
输入
滤波器
熔断器
A1
A2 输出
电抗器
输出
滤波器
DC-
制动电阻
DC+
制动单元
单相 220V选配
Diagram 4-7 Connection diagram of main circuit
Note:
u The fuse, DC reactor, braking unit, braking resistor, input reactor, input filter, output
reactor, output filter are optional parts. Please refer to Peripheral Optional Parts for
detailed information.
u A1 and A2 are optional parts.
u P1 and (+) are short circuited in factory, if need to connect with the DC rector, please
remove the contact tag between P1 and (+).
4.3.2 Terminals figure of main circuit
Fig 4-8 1.5~2.2 kW terminals of main circuit

28
Fig 4-9 4~5.5 kW terminals of main circuit
Fig 4-10 7.5~11kW terminals of main circuit
Fig 4-11 15~18kW terminals of main circuit

29
Fig 4-13 37~55 kW terminals of main circuit

30
Terminal
sign
Terminal name
Function
Below 30kW
(including 30
kW)
Above 37kW(including 37 kW)
R
Power input of the main circuit
3-phase AC input terminals
which are generally
connected with the power
supply.
S
T
U
The inverter output
3-phase AC output terminals
which are generally
connected with the motor.
V
W
P1
This terminal is
inexistent
DC reactor terminal 1
P1 and (+) are connected
with the terminals of DC
reactor.
(+) and (-) are connected
with the terminals of braking
unit.
PB and (+) are connected
with the terminals of braking
resistor.
(+)
Braking resistor
1
DC reactor terminal 2, braking unit
terminal 1
(-) / Braking unit terminal 2
PB
Braking
resistor 2
This terminal is inexistent.
PE 400V:the grounding resistor is less than 10Ohm
Protective grounding
terminals, every machine is
provided 2 PE terminals as
the standard configuration.
These terminals should be
grounded with proper
techniques.
A1 and A2 Control power supply terminal
Optional parts (external
220V control power
supply)
Note:
u Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. If there is a symmetrically
constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive

31
shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the inverter
and motor ends.
u Braking resistor, braking unit and DC reactor are optional parts.
u Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately.
u If the terminal is not appeared, the machine does not provide the terminal as the
external terminal.
4.3.3 Wiring of terminals in main circuit
1. Fasten the grounding conductor of the input power cable with the grounding terminal of
the inverter (PE) by 360 degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to R, S
and T terminals and fasten.
2. Strip the motor cable and connect the shield to the grounding terminal of the inverter by
360 degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to U, V and W terminals
and fasten.
3. Connect the optional brake resistor with a shielded cable to the designated position by the
same procedures in the previous step.
4. Secure the cables outside the inverter mechanically.
Fig 4-16 Correct installation of the screw
Fig 4-17 360 degree grounding technique

32
4.3.4 Wiring diagram of control circuit
Fig 4-18 Wiring of control circuit
4.3.5 Terminals of control circuit
Fig 4-19 Terminals of control circuit

33
Terminal
name
Description
+10V Local power supply +10V
AI1 1. Input range: AI1/AI2 voltage and current can be chose:
0~10V/0~20mA；AI1 can be shifted by J1; AI2 can be shifted by J2
AI3:-10V~+10V
2. Input impedance:voltage input: 20kΩ; current input: 500Ω
3. Resolution: the minimum one is 5mV when 10V corresponds to
50Hz
4. Deviation ±1%, 25℃
AI2
AI3
GND +10V reference null potential
AO1 1. Output range:0~10V or -20~20mA
2. The voltage or the current output is depended on the jumper
3. Deviation±1%,25℃
AO2
Terminal
name
Description
RO1A
RO1 relay output, RO1A NO, RO1B NC, RO1C common terminal
RO1B
RO1C
RO2A
RO2 relay output, RO2A NO, RO2B NC, RO2C common terminal
RO2B
RO2C

34
Terminal
name
Description
PE Grounding terminal
PW
Provide the input switch working power supply from external to
internal.
Voltage range: 12~24V
24V
The inverter provides the power supply for users with a maximum
output current of 200mA
COM +24V common terminal
S1 Switch input 1
1. Internal impedance:3.3kΩ
2. 12~30V voltage input is available
3. The terminal is the dual-direction input
terminal supporting both NPN and PNP
4. Max input frequency:1kHz
5. All are programmable digital input
terminal. User can set the terminal function
through function codes.
S2 Switch input 2
S3 Switch input 3
S4 Switch input 4
S5 Switch input 5
S6 Switch input 6
S7 Switch input 7
S8 Switch input 8
HDI
Except for S1~S8, this terminal can be used as high frequency
input channel.
Max. input frequency:50kHz
Terminal
name
Description
24V
The inverter provides the power supply for users with a maximum
output current of 200mA
HDO
1. Switch input:200mA/30V
2. Output frequency range:0~50kHz
COM +24V common terminal
CME Common terminal of the open collector pole output
Y
1.Swtich capability:200mA/30V
2.Output frequency range:0~1kHz

35
485+ 485 communication interface and 485 differential signal interface
If it is the standard 485 communication interface, please use
twisted pairs or shield cable.
485-
4.3.6 Input /Output signal connection figure
Please use U-shaped contact tag to set NPN mode or PNP mode and the internal or external
power supply. The default setting is NPN internal mode.
Fig 4-20 U-shaped contact tag
If the signal is from NPN transistor, please set the U-shaped contact tag between +24V and
PW as below according to the used power supply.
Diagram 4-21 NPN modes
If the signal is from PNP transistor, please set the U-shaped contact tag as below according
to the used power supply.

36
Diagram 4-22 PNP modes
4.4 Layout protection
4.4.1 Protecting the inverter and input power cable in short-circuit situations
Protect the inverter and input power cable in short circuit situations and against thermal
overload.
Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines.
Fig 4-23 Fuse configuration
Note: Select the fuse as the manual indicated. The fuse will protect the input power cable
from damage in short-circuit situations. It will protect the surrounding devices when the
internal of the inverter is short circuited.
4.4.2 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations
The inverter protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the motor
cable is dimensioned according to the rated current of the inverter. No additional protection
devices are needed.
²If the inverter is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal
overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each
cable and motor. These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off

37
the short-circuit current.
4.4.3 Protecting the motor against thermal overload
According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the
current must be switched off when overload is detected. The inverter includes a motor
thermal protection function that protects the motor and closes the output to switch off the
current when necessary.
4.4.4 Implementing a bypass connection
It is necessary to set power frequency and variable frequency conversion circuits for the
assurance of continuous normal work of the inverter if faults occur in some significant
situations.
In some special situations, for example, if it is only used in soft start, the inverter can be
conversed into power frequency running after starting and some corresponding bypass
should be added.
²Never connect the supply power to the inverter output terminals U, V
and W. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the inverter.
If frequent shifting is required, employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to
ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and inverter output
terminals simultaneously.

Goodrive300 inverters Keypad operation procedure
38
Keypad Operation Procedure 5
This chapter contains following operation:
• Buttons, indicating lights and the screen as well as the methods to inspect, modify and
set function codes by keypad
• Start-up
5.2 Keypad
The keypad is used to control Goodrive300 series inverters, read the state data and adjust
parameters.
Fig 5-1 Keypad
Seri
al
No.
Name Description
1 State LED
RUN/TUNE
LED off means that the inverter is in the
stopping state; LED blinking means the
inverter is in the parameter autotune
state; LED on means the inverter is in
the running state.
FWD/REV
FED/REV LED
LED off means the inverter is in the
forward rotation state; LED on means

39
Seri
al
No.
Name Description
the inverter is in the reverse rotation
state
LOCAL/REMOT
LED for keypad operation, terminals
operation and remote communication
control
LED off means that the inverter is in the
keypad operation state; LED blinking
means the inverter is in the terminals
operation state; LED on means the
inverter is in the remote communication
control state.
TRIP
LED for faults
LED on when the inverter is in the fault
state; LED off in normal state; LED
blinking means the inverter is in the
pre-alarm state.
2 Unit LED
Mean the unit displayed currently
Hz Frequency unit
A Current unit
V Voltage unit
RPM Rotating speed unit
% Percentage
3
Code
displaying
zone
5-figure LED display displays various monitoring data and alarm code
such as set frequency and output frequency.
Display
ed
word
Correspon
ding word
Display
ed
word
Correspon
ding word
Display
ed
word
Correspon
ding word
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7 8

40
Seri
al
No.
Name Description
9 A B
C d E
F H I
L N n
o P r
S t U
v . -
4
Digital
potentiom
eter
Tuning frequency. Please refer to P08.41.
5 Buttons
Programming key
Enter or escape from the first level
menu and remove the parameter
quickly
Entry key
Enter the menu step-by-step
Confirm parameters
UP key
Increase data or function code
progressively
DOWN key
Decrease data or function code
progressively
Right-shift key
Move right to select the displaying
parameter circularly in stopping and
running mode.
Select the parameter modifying digit
during the parameter modification
Run key
This key is used to operate on the
inverter in key operation mode
Stop/
Reset key
This key is used to stop in running state
and it is limited by function code P07.04
This key is used to reset all control

41
Seri
al
No.
Name Description
modes in the fault alarm state
Quick key
The function of this key is confirmed by
function code P07.02.
5.3 Keypad displaying
The keypad displaying state of Goodrive300 series inverters is divided into stopping state
parameter, running state parameter, function code parameter editing state and fault alarm
state and so on.
5.3.1 Displayed state of stopping parameter
When the inverter is in the stopping state, the keypad will display stopping parameters which
is shown in figure 5-2.
In the stopping state, various kinds of parameters can be displayed. Select the parameters
to be displayed or not by P07.07. See the instructions of P07.07 for the detailed definition of
each bit.
In the stopping state, there are 14 stopping parameters can be selected to be displayed or
not. They are: set frequency, bus voltage, input terminals state, output terminals state, PID
given, PID feedback, torque set value, AI1, AI2, AI3, HDI, PLC and the current stage of
multi-stage speeds, pulse counting value, length value. P07.07 can select the parameter to
be displayed or not by bit and 》/SHIFT can shift the parameters form left to right,
QUICK/JOG(P07.02=2) can shift the parameters form right to left.
5.3.2 Displayed state of running parameters
After the inverter receives valid running commands, the inverter will enter into the running
state and the keypad will display the running parameters. RUN/TUNE LED on the keypad is
on, while the FWD/REV is determined by the current running direction which is shown as
figure 5-2.
In the running state, there are 24 parameters can be selected to be displayed or not. They
are: running frequency, set frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output torque, PID given,
PID feedback, input terminals state, output terminals state, torque set value, length value,
PLC and the current stage of multi-stage speeds, pulse counting value, AI1, AI2, AI3, HDI,
percentage of motor overload, percentage of inverter overload, ramp given value, linear

42
speed, AC input current. P07.05 and P07.06 can select the parameter to be displayed or not
by bit and》/SHIFT can shift the parameters form left to right, QUICK/JOG(P07.02=2) can
shift the parameters from right to left.
5.3.3 Displayed state of fault
If the inverter detects the fault signal, it will enter into the fault pre-alarm displaying state. The
keypad will display the fault code by flicking. The TRIP LED on the keypad is on, and the
fault reset can be operated by theSTOP/RST on the keypad, control terminals or
communication commands.
5.3.4 Displayed state of function codes editing
In the state of stopping, running or fault, press PRG/ESC to enter into the editing state (if
there is a password, see P07.00 ).The editing state is displayed on two classes of menu, and
the order is: function code group/function code number→function code parameter, press
DATA/ENT into the displayed state of function parameter. On this state, you can press
DATA/ENT to save the parameters or press PRG/ESC to retreat.
Fig 5-2 Displayed state
5.4 Keypad operation
Operate the inverter via operation panel. See the detailed structure description of function
codes in the brief diagram of function codes.
5.4.1 How to modify the function codes of the inverter
The inverter has three levels menu, which are:
1. Group number of function code (first-level menu)
2. Tab of function code (second-level menu)
3. Set value of function code (third-level menu)

43
Remarks: Press both the PRG/ESC and the DATA/ENT can return to the second-level menu
from the third-level menu. The difference is: pressing DATA/ENT will save the set
parameters into the control panel, and then return to the second-level menu with shifting to
the next function code automatically; while pressing PRG/ESC will directly return to the
second-level menu without saving the parameters, and keep staying at the current function
code.
Under the third-level menu, if the parameter has no flickering bit, it means the function code
cannot be modified. The possible reasons could be:
1) This function code is not modifiable parameter, such as actual detected parameter,
operation records and so on;
2) This function code is not modifiable in running state, but modifiable in stop state.
Example:Set function code P00.01 from 0 to 1.
Fig 5-2 Sketch map of modifying parameters
5.4.2 How to set the password of the inverter
Goodrive300 series inverters provide password protection function to users. Set P7.00 to
gain the password and the password protection becomes valid instantly after quitting from
the function code editing state. Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state,
“0.0.0.0.0” will be displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot enter
it.
Set P7.00 to 0 to cancel password protection function.
The password protection becomes effective instantly after retreating form the function code
editing state. Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state, “0.0.0.0.0” will be

44
displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot enter it.
Fig 5-3 Sketch map of password setting
5.4.3 How to watch the inverter state through function codes
Goodrive300 series inverters provide group P17 as the state inspection group. Users can
enter into P17 directly to watch the state.
Fig 5-4 Sketch map of state watching

Goodrive300 inverters Function codes
45
Function Parameters 6
This chapter lists and describes the function parameters.
6.2 Goodrive300 general series function parameters
The function parameters of Goodrive300 series inverters have been divided into 30 groups
(P00~P29) according to the function, of which P18~P28 are reserved. Each function group
contains certain function codes applying 3-level menus. For example, “P08.08” means the
eighth function code in the P8 group function, P29 group is factory reserved, and users are
forbidden to access these parameters.
For the convenience of function codes setting, the function group number corresponds to the
first level menu, the function code corresponds to the second level menu and the function
code corresponds to the third level menu.
1. Below is the instruction of the function lists:
The first line “Function code”:codes of function parameter group and parameters；
The second line “Name”:full name of function parameters；
The third line “Detailed illustration of parameters”:Detailed illustration of the function
parameters
The fourth line “Default value”:the original factory set value of the function parameter；
The fifth line “Modify”:the modifying character of function codes (the parameters can be
modified or not and the modifying conditions),below is the instruction:
“○”: means the set value of the parameter can be modified on stop and running state；
“◎”: means the set value of the parameter can not be modified on the running state；
“●”: means the value of the parameter is the real detection value which can not be
modified.
(The inverter has limited the automatic inspection of the modifying character of the
parameters to help users avoid mismodifying)
2. “Parameter radix” is decimal (DEC), if the parameter is expressed by hex, then the
parameter is separated from each other when editing. The setting range of certain bits are
0~F (hex).
3.”The default value” means the function parameter will restore to the default value during
default parameters restoring. But the detected parameter or recorded value won’t be

46
restored.
4. For a better parameter protection, the inverter provides password protection to the
parameters. After setting the password (set P07.00 to any non-zero number), the system will
come into the state of password verification firstly after the user press PRG/ESC to come
into the function code editing state. And then “0.0.0.0.0.” will be displayed. Unless the user
input right password, they cannot enter into the system. For the factory setting parameter
zone, it needs correct factory password (remind that the users can not modify the factory
parameters by themselves, otherwise, if the parameter setting is incorrect, damage to the
inverter may occur). If the password protection is unlocked, the user can modify the
password freely and the inverter will work as the last setting one. When P07.00 is set to 0,
the password can be canceled. If P07.00 is not 0 during powering on, then the parameter is
protected by the password. When modify the parameters by serial communication, the
function of the password follows the above rules, too.
Functio
n code
Name Detailed instruction of parameters
Default
value
Modify
P00 Group Basic function group
P00.00
Speed
control mode
0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying to
AM,SM)
0 is suitable in most cases, and in principle, one
inverter can only drive one motor in the vector
control mode.
1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 (applying to
AM)
1 is suitable in high performance cases with the
advantage of high accuracy of rotating speed and
torque. It does not need to install pulse encoder.
2:V/F control (applying to AM,SM)
2 is suitable in cases where it does not need high
control accuracy, such as the load of fan and pump.
One inverter can drive multiple motors.
Note: AM-Asynchronous motor SM- synchronous
motor
0 ◎
P00.01 Run Select the run command channel of the inverter. 0 ○

47
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
command
channel
The control command of the inverter includes:
start-up, stop, forward, reverse, jogging and fault
reset.
0:Keypad running command
channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” light off)
Carry out the command control by RUN, STOP/RST
on the keypad.
Set the multi-function key QUICK/JOG to
FWD/REVC shifting function (P07.02=3) to change
the running direction; press RUN and STOP/RST
simultaneously in running state to make the inverter
coast to stop.
1:Terminal running command channel
(“LOCAL/REMOT” flickering)
Carry out the running command control by the
forward rotation, reverse rotation and forward
jogging and reverse jogging of the multi-function
terminals
2:Communication running command channel
(“LOCAL/REMOT” on)；
The running command is controlled by the upper
monitor via communication
P00.02
Communicati
on running
commands
channel
selection
Select the controlling communication command
channel of the inverter.
0:MODBUS communication channel
1:PROFIBUS communication channel
2:Ethernet communication channel
3:CAN communication channel
Note: 1, 2 and 3 are extension functions which can
be used only when corresponding extension cards
are configured.
0 ○

48
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P00.03
Max. output
frequency
This parameter is used to set the maximum output
frequency of the inverter. Users should pay attention
to this parameter because it is the foundation of the
frequency setting and the speed of acceleration and
deceleration.
Setting range: P00.04~400.00Hz
50.00Hz ◎
P00.04
Upper limit of
the running
frequency
The upper limit of the running frequency is the upper
limit of the output frequency of the inverter which is
lower than or equal to the maximum frequency.
Setting range:P00.05~P00.03 (Max. output
frequency)
50.00Hz ◎
P00.05
Lower limit of
the running
frequency
The lower limit of the running frequency is that of the
output frequency of the inverter.
The inverter runs at the lower limit frequency if the
set frequency is lower than the lower limit one.
Note: Max. output frequency ≥ Upper limit frequency
≥ Lower limit frequency
Setting range:0.00Hz~P00.04 (Upper limit of the
running frequency)
0.00Hz ◎
P00.06
A frequency
command
selection
0:Keypad data setting
Modify the value of function code P00.10 (set the
frequency by keypad) to modify the frequency by the
keypad.
1:Analog AI1 setting
Set the frequency by analog input terminals.
Goodrive300 series inverters provide 3 channels
analog input terminals as the standard configuration,
of which AI1/AI2 are the voltage/current option
(0~10V/0~20mA) which can be shifted by jumpers;
0 ○
P00.07
B frequency
command
selection
1 ○

49
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
while AI3 is voltage input (-10V~+10V).
Note: when analog AI1/AI2 select 0~20mA input, the
corresponding voltage of 20mA is 10V.
100.0% of the analog input setting corresponds to
the maximum frequency (function code P00.03) in
forward direction and -100.0% corresponds to the
maximum frequency in reverse direction (function
code P00.03)
4:High-speed pulse HDI setting
The frequency is set by high-speed pulse terminals.
Goodrive300 series inverters provide 1 channel high
speed pulse input as the standard configuration. The
pulse frequency range is 0.0~50.00kHz.
100.0% of the high speed pulse input setting
corresponds to the maximum frequency in forward
direction (function code P00.03) and -100.0%
corresponds to the maximum frequency in reverse
direction (function code P00.03).
Note: The pulse setting can only be input by
multi-function terminals HDI. Set P05.00 (HDI input
selection) to high speed pulse input, and set P05.49
(HDI high speed pulse input function selection) to
frequency setting input.
5:Simple PLC program setting
The inverter runs at simple PLC program mode
when P00.06=5 or P00.07=5. Set P10 (simple PLC
and multi-stage speed control) to select the running
frequency, running direction, ACC/DEC time and the
keeping time of corresponding stage. See the
function description of P10 for detailed information.
6: Multi-stage speed running setting

50
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The inverter runs at multi-stage speed mode when
P00.06=6 or P00.07=6. Set P05 to select the current
running stage, and set P10 to select the current
running frequency.
The multi-stage speed has the priority when P00.06
or P00.07 does not equal to 6, but the setting stage
can only be the 1~15 stage. The setting stage is
1~15 if P00.06 or P00.07 equals to 6.
7: PID control setting
The running mode of the inverter is process PID
control when P00.06=7 or P00.07=7. It is necessary
to set P09. The running frequency of the inverter is
the value after PID effect. See P09 for the detailed
information of the preset source, preset value,
feedback source of PID.
8:MODBUS communication setting
The frequency is set by MODBUS communication.
See P14 for detailed information.
9:PROFIBUS communication setting
The frequency is set by PROFIBUS communication.
See P15 for the detailed information.
10:Ethernet communication setting(reserved)
11:CAN communication setting(reserved)
Note:A frequency and B frequency can not set as
the same frequency given method.
P00.08
B frequency
command
reference
selection
0:Maximum output frequency, 100% of
B frequency setting corresponds to the maximum
output frequency
1:A frequency command, 100% of B frequency
setting corresponds to the maximum output
frequency. Select this setting if it needs to adjust on
0 ○

51
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
the base of A frequency command.
P00.09
Combination
type of the
setting
source
0: A, the current frequency setting is A freauency
command
1: B, the current frequency setting is B frequency
command
2: A+B, the current frequency setting is A frequency
command + B frequency command
3: A-B, the current frequency setting is A frequency
command - B frequency command
4: Max(A, B):The bigger one between A frequency
command and B frequency is the set frequency.
5: Min(A, B):The lower one between A frequency
command and B frequency is the set frequency.
Note:The combination manner can be shifted by
P05(terminal function)
0 ○
P00.10
Keypad set
frequency
When A and B frequency commands are selected as
“keypad setting”, this parameter will be the initial
value of inverter reference frequency
Setting range:0.00 Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency)
50.00Hz ○
P00.11 ACC time 1
ACC time means the time needed if the inverter
speeds up from 0Hz to the Max. One (P00.03).
DEC time means the time needed if the inverter
speeds down from the Max. Output frequency to 0Hz
(P00.03).
Goodrive300 series inverters define four groups of
ACC/DEC time which can be selected by P05. The
factory default ACC/DEC time of the inverter is the
first group.
Setting range of P00.11 and P00.12:0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on the
motor
type
○
P00.12 DEC time 1
Depend
on the
motor
type
○
P00.13
Running
direction
0: Runs at the default direction, the inverter runs in
the forward direction. FWD/REV indicator is off.
0 ○

52
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
selection 1: Runs at the opposite direction, the inverter runs in
the reverse direction. FWD/REV indicator is on.
Modify the function code to shift the rotation direction
of the motor. This effect equals to the shifting the
rotation direction by adjusting either two of the motor
lines (U, V and W). The motor rotation direction can
be changed by QUICK/JOG on the keypad. Refer to
parameter P07.02.
Note: When the function parameter comes back to
the default value, the motor’s running direction will
come back to the factory default state, too. In some
cases it should be used with caution after
commissioning if the change of rotation direction is
disabled.
2: Forbid to run in reverse direction: It can be used in
some special cases if the reverse running is
disabled.
P00.14
Carrier
frequency
setting
The relationship table of the motor type and carrier
frequency:
Motor type
The factory value of
carrier frequency
1.5~11kW 8kHz
15~55kW 4kHz
Above 75kW 2kHz
The advantage of high carrier frequency: ideal
current waveform, little current harmonic wave and
Depend
on the
motor
type
○

53
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
motor noise.
The disadvantage of high carrier frequency:
increasing the switch loss, increasing inverter
temperature and the impact to the output capacity.
The inverter needs to derate on high carrier
frequency. At the same time, the leakage and
electrical magnetic interference will increase.
Applying low carrier frequency is contrary to the
above, too low carrier frequency will cause unstable
running, torque decreasing and surge.
The manufacturer has set a reasonable carrier
frequency when the inverter is in factory. In general,
users do not need to change the parameter.
When the frequency used exceeds the default carrier
frequency, the inverter needs to derate 20% for each
additional 1k carrier frequency.
Setting range:1.0~15.0kHz
P00.15
Motor
parameter
autotuning
0:No operation
1:Rotation autotuning
Comprehensive motor parameter autotune
It is recommended to use rotation autotuning when
high control accuracy is needed.
2:Static autotuning
It is suitable in the cases when the motor can not
de-couple form the load. The antotuning for the
motor parameter will impact the control accuracy.
0 ◎
P00.16
AVR function
selection
0:Invalid
1:Valid during the whole prodecure
The auto-adjusting function of the inverter can
cancel the impact on the output voltage of the
inverter because of the bus voltage fluctuation.
1 ○

54
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P00.17 Reserved Reserved 0 ◎
P00.18
Function
restore
parameter
0:No operation
1:Restore the default value
2:Clear fault records
Note: The function code will restore to 0 after
finishing the operation of the selected function code.
Restoring to the default value will cancel the user
password, please use this function with caution.
0 ◎
P01 Group Start-up and stop control
P01.00 Start method
0:Start-up directly:start from the starting frequency
P01.01
1:Start-up after DC braking: start the motor from the
starting frequency after DC braking (set the
parameter P01.03 and P01.04). It is suitable in the
cases where reverse rotation may occur to the low
inertia load during starting.
2: Start-up after reverse tracing: start the rotating
motor smoothly after tracking the rotation speed and
direction automatically. It is suitable in the cases
where reverse rotation may occur to the big inertia
load during starting.
Note: it is recommended to start the synchronous
motor directly.
0 ◎
P01.01
Starting
frequency of
direct
start-up
Starting frequency of direct start-up means the
original frequency during the inverter starting. See
P01.02 for detailed information.
Setting range: 0.00~50.00Hz
0.50Hz ◎
P01.02
Retention
time of the
starting
frequency
Set a proper starting frequency to increase the
torque of the inverter during starting. During the
retention time of the starting frequency, the output
frequency of the inverter is the starting frequency.
0.0s ◎

55
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
And then, the inverter will run from the starting
frequency to the set frequency. If the set frequency is
lower than the starting frequency, the inverter will
stop running and keep in the stand-by state. The
starting frequency is not limited in the lower limit
frequency.
Setting range: 0.0~50.0s
P01.03
The braking
current
before
starting
The inverter will carry out DC braking at the braking
current set before starting and it will speed up after
the DC braking time. If the DC braking time is set to
0, the DC braking is invalid.
The stronger the braking current, the bigger the
braking power. The DC braking current before
starting means the percentage of the rated current of
the inverter.
The setting range of P01.03: 0.0~150.0%
The setting range of P01.04: 0.0~50.0s
0.0% ◎
P01.04
The braking
time before
starting
0.0s ◎
P01.05
ACC/DEC
selection
The changing mode of the frequency during start-up
and running.
0:Linear type
0 ◎

56
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The output frequency increases or decreases
linearly.
1:S curve type: The output frequency increases or
decreases at the S curve.
S curve is suitable in the cases where a gentle
start-up or stopping is needed, such as, elevators
and conveyer belt.
P01.06
The starting
segment
proportion of
S curve
Setting range: 0.0~50.0% (ACC/DEC time)
30.0% ◎
P01.07
The ending
segment
proportion of
S curve
30.0% ◎
P01.08
Stop
selection
0:Decelerate to stop: after the stop command
becomes valid, the inverter decelerates to decrease
0 ○

57
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
the output frequency during the set time. When the
frequency decreases to 0, the inverter stops.
1:Coast to stop: after the stop command becomes
valid, the inverter ceases the output immediately.
And the load coasts to stop at the mechanical inertia.
P01.09
Starting
frequency of
DC braking
Starting frequency of DC braking: start the DC
braking when running frequency reaches starting
frequency determined by P1.09.
Waiting time before DC braking: Inverters blocks the
output before starting the DC braking. After this
waiting time, the DC braking will be started so as to
prevent over-current fault caused by DC braking at
high speed.
DC braking current：The value of P01.11 is the
percentage of rated current of inverter. The bigger
the DC braking current is, the greater the braking
torque is.
DC braking time: The retention time of DC brake. If
the time is 0, the DC brake is invalid. The inverter will
stop at the set deceleration time.
Setting range of P01.09: 0.00~P00.03 (the Max.
frequency)
0.00Hz ○
P01.10
Waiting time
before DC
braking
0.0s ○
P01.11
DC braking
current
0.0%
○
P01.12
DC braking
time
0.0s
○

58
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range of P01.10: 0.0~50.0s
Setting range of P01.11: 0.0~150.0%
P01.13
Dead time of
FWD/REV
rotation
During the procedure of switching FWD/REV
rotation, set the threshold by P01.14, which is as the
table below:
0.0s ○
P01.14
Switching
between
FWD/REV
rotation
Set the threshold point of the inverter:
0:Switch after 0 frequency
1:Switch after the starting frequency
0 ◎
P01.15
Stopping
speed
0.00~100.00Hz 0.10 Hz ◎
P01.16
Detection of
stopping
speed
0: Speed setting (the only detection method in V/F
mode)
1: Speed detecting value
When the actual output frequency of the inverter is
lower than P01.15 and the lasting time is beyond
P01.17, the running state ends and the inverter
stops.
0 ◎
P01.17
The delay
time of the
stopping
Setting range: 0.00~10.00 s 0.05s ◎

59
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
speed
P01.18
Terminal
running
protection
selection
when
powering on
When the running command channel is the terminal
control, the system will detect the state of the
running terminal during powering on.
0:The terminal running command is invalid when
powering on. Even the running command is detected
to be valid during powering on, the inverter won’t run
and the system keeps in the protection state until the
running command is canceled and enabled again.
1: The terminal running command is valid when
powering on. If the running command is detected to
be valid during powering on, the system will start the
inverter automatically after the initialization.
Note: this function should be selected with cautions,
or serious result may follow.
0 ○
P01.19
The running
frequency is
lower than
the lower
limit one
(valid if the
lower limit
frequency is
above 0)
This function code determines the running state of
the inverter when the set frequency is lower than the
lower-limit one.
0: Run at the lower-limit frequency
1: Stop
2: Hibernation
The inverter will coast to stop when the set
frequency is lower than the lower-limit one.if the set
frequency is above the lower limit one again and it
0 ◎

60
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
lasts for the time set by P01.20, the inverter will
come back to the running state automatically.
P01.20
Hibernation
restore delay
time
This function code determines the Hibernation delay
time. When the running frequency of the inverter is
lower than the lower limit one, the inverter will pause
to stand by.
When the set frequency is above the lower limit one
again and it lasts for the time set by P01.20, the
inverter will run automatically.
Note: The time is the total value when the set
frequency is above the lower limit one.
Setting range: 0.0~3600.0s (valid when P01.19=2)
0.0s ○
P01.21
Restart after
power off
This function can enable the inverter start or not after
the power off and then power on.
0: Ddisable
1: Enable, if the starting need is met, the inverter will
run automatically after waiting for the time defined by
P01.22.
0 ○
P01.22
The waiting
time of
restart after
power off
The function determines the waiting time before the
automatic running of the inverter when powering off
and then powering on.
1.0s ○

61
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range: 0.0~3600.0s (valid when P01.21=1)
P01.23
Start delay
time
The function determines the brake release after the
running command is given, and the inverter is in a
stand-by state and wait for the delay time set by
P01.23
0.0s ○
P01.24 Reserved ●
P01.25 Reserved ●
P02 Group Motor 1
P02.00 Motor type 1
0:Asynchronous motor
1:Synchronous motor
Note: Switch the current motor by the switching
channel of P08.31.
0 ◎
P02.01
Asynchronou
s motor 1
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.02
Asynchronou
s motor 1
rated power
0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ◎
P02.03
Asynchronou
s motor 1
rated speed
1~36000rpm
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.04
Asynchronou
s motor 1
0~1200V
Depend
on
◎

62
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
rated voltage module
P02.05
Asynchronou
s motor 1
rated current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.06
Asynchronou
s motor 1
stator
resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
○
P02.07
Asynchronou
s motor 1
rotor resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
○
P02.08
Asynchronou
s motor 1
leakage
inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
○
P02.09
Asynchronou
s motor
1mutual
inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
○
P02.10
Asynchronou
s motor 1
non-load
current
0.1~6553.5A
Depend
on
module
○
P02.11 Reserved ◎
P02.12 Reserved ◎
P02.13 Reserved ◎
P02.14 Reserved ◎
P02.15
Synchronous
motor 1 rated
power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.16 Synchronous 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ◎

63
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
motor 1 rated
frequency
P02.17
Synchronous
motor 1
number of
poles pairs
1~50 2 ◎
P02.18
Synchronous
motor 1 rated
voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.19
Synchronous
motor 1 rated
current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
◎
P02.20
Synchronous
motor 1
stator
resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
○
P02.21
Synchronous
motor 1
Direct axis
inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
○
P02.22
Synchronous
motor 1
Quadrature
axis
inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
○
P02.23
Synchronous
motor 1 Back
EMF
constant
When P00.15=2, the set value of P02.23 cannot be
updated by autotuning, please count according to
the following method.
The counter-electromotive force constant can be
counted according to the parameters on the name
plate of the motor. There are three ways to count:
300 ○

64
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1. If the name plate designate the
counter-electromotive force constant Ke, then:
E=（Ke*nN*2π）/ 60
2. If the name plate designate the
counter-electromotive force constant
E’(V/1000r/min), then:
E=E’*nN/1000
3. If the name plate does not designate the above
parameters, then:
E=P/√3*I
In the above formulas: nN is the rated rotation speed,
P is the rated power and I is the rated current.
Setting range: 0~10000
P02.24 Reserved ●
P02.25 Reserved ●
P02.26
Motor 1
overload
protection
selection
0:No protection
1:Common motor (with low speed compensation).
Because the heat-releasing effect of the common
motors will be weakened, the corresponding electric
heat protection will be adjusted properly. The low
speed compensation characteristic mentioned here
means reducing the threshold of the overload
protection of the motor whose running frequency is
below 30Hz.
2: Frequency conversion motor (without low speed
compensation) Because the heat-releasing effect of
the specific motors won’t be impacted by the rotation
speed, it is not necessary to adjust the protection
value during low-speed running.
2 ◎
P02.27
Motor 1 over
load
When P02.27=overload protection current of the
motor/rated current of the motor
100.0% ○

65
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
protection
coefficient
So, the bigger the overload coefficient is, the shorter
the reporting time of the overload fault is. When the
overload coefficient <110%, there is no overload
protection. When the overload coefficient =116%,
the fault will be reported after 1 hour, when the
overload coefficient=200%, the fault will be reported
after 1 minute.
Setting range: 20.0%~120.0%
P02.28 Reserved ●
P02.29 Reserved ●
P03 Group Vector control
P03.00
Speed loop
proportional
gain1
The parameters P03.00~P03.05 only apply to vector
control mode. Below the switching frequency
1(P03.02), the speed loop PI parameters are:
P03.00 and P03.01. Above the switching frequency
2(P03.05), the speed loop PI parameters are:
P03.03 and P03.04. PI parameters are gained
according to the linear change of two groups of
parameters. It is shown as below:
20.0 ○
P03.01
Speed loop
integral
time1
0.200s ○
P03.02
Low
switching
frequency
5.00Hz ○
P03.03
Speed loop
proportional
20.0 ○

66
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
gain 2
Setting the proportional coefficient and integral time
of the adjustor and change the dynamic response
performance of vector control speed loop. Increasing
the proportional gain and decreasing the integral
time can speed up the dynamic response of the
speed loop. But too high proportional gain and too
low integral time may cause system vibration and
overshoot. Too low proportional gain may cause
system vibration and speed static deviation.
PI has a close relationship with the inertia of the
system. Adjust on the base of PI according to
different loads to meet various demands.
The setting range of P03.00:0~200.0
The setting range of P03.01:0.001~10.000s
The setting range of P03.02:0.00Hz~P03.05
The setting range of P03.03:0~200.0
The setting range of P03.04:0.001~10.000s
The setting range of P03.05:P03.02~P00.03(the
Max. frequency)
P03.04
Speed loop
integral time
2
0.200s ○
P03.05
High
switching
frequency
10.00Hz ○
P03.06
Speed loop
output filter
0~8( corresponds to 0~28
/10ms) 0 ○
P03.07
Vector
control
electromotio
Slip compensation coefficient is used to adjust the
slip frequency of the vector control and improve the
speed control accuracy of the system. Adjusting the
100% ○

67
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
n slip
compensatio
n coefficient
parameter properly can control the speed
steady-state error.
Setting range:50%~200%
P03.08
Vector
control brake
slip
compensatio
n coefficient
100% ○
P03.09
Current loop
percentage
coefficient P
Note:
1 These two parameters adjust the PI adjustment
parameter of the current loop which affects the
dynamic response speed and control accuracy
directly. Generally, users do not need to change the
default value.
2 Only apply to the vector control mode without PG
0(P00.00=0).
Setting range:0~65535
1000 ○
P03.10
Current loop
integral
coefficient 1
1000 ○
P03.11
Torque
setting
method
This parameter is used to enable the torque control
mode, and set the torque setting means.
0:Torque control is invalid
1:Keypad setting torque(P03.12)
2:Analog AI1 setting torque
5:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque
6: Multi-stage torque setting
7:MODBUS communication setting torque
8:PROFIBUS communication setting torque
9:Ethernet communication setting torque
10:CAN communication setting torque
Note: 100% of Setting methods 2~10, corresponds
0 ○

68
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
to three times of the rated current of the motor.
P03.12
Keypad
setting
torque
Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(motor rated current)50.0% ○
P03.13
Torque given
filter time
0.000~10.000s 0.100s ○
P03.14
Torque
control
forward
rotation
upper-limit
frequency
setting
source
selection
0:keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.16 sets
P03.14,P03.17 sets P03.15)
1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency
4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency
5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit frequency
6:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit
frequency
7:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit
frequency
8:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit
frequency
9:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency
Note:setting method 1~9, 100% corresponds to the
maximum frequency
0 ○
P03.15
Torque
control
reverse
rotation
upper-limit
frequency
keypad
defined value
0 ○
P03.16
Torque
control
forward
rotation
upper-limit
frequency
keypad
This function is used to set the upper limit of the
frequency. P03.16 sets the value of P03.14; P03.17
sets the value of P03.15.
Setting range:0.00 Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output
frequency)
50.00 Hz ○

69
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
defined value
P03.17
Torque
control
reverse
rotation
upper-limit
frequency
keypad
defined value
50.00 Hz ○
P03.18
Electromotio
n torque
upper-limit
setting
source
selection
This function code is used to select the
electromotion and braking torque upper-limit setting
source selection.
0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.20 sets
P03.18,P03.21 sets P03.19)
1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit torque
4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit torque
torque
torque
7:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit torque
8:CAN communication setting upper-limit torque
Note:setting method 1~9,100% corresponds to three
times of the motor current.
0 ○
P03.19
Braking
torque
upper-limit
setting
source
selection
0 ○
P03.20
Electromotio
n torque
upper-limit
The function code is used to set the limit of the
torque.
180.0% ○

70
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
keypad
setting
Setting range:0.0~300.0%(motor rated current)
P03.21
Braking
torque
upper-limit
keypad
setting
180.0% ○
P03.22
Weakening
coefficient in
constant
power zone
The usage of motor in weakening control.
Function code P03.22 and P03.23 are effective at
constant power. The motor will enter into the
weakening state when the motor runs at rated
speed. Change the weakening curve by modifying
the weakening control coefficienct. The bigger the
weakening control coefficienct is, the steeper the
weak curve is.
The setting range of P03.22:0.1~2.0
The setting range of P03.23:10%~100%
1.0 ○
P03.23
The lowest
weakening
point in
Constant
power zone
50% ○
P03.24
Max. voltage
limit
P03.24 set the Max. Voltage of the inverter, which is
dependent on the site situation.
The setting range:0.0~120.0%
100.0% ◎
P03.25
Pre-exciting
time
Pre-activate the motor when the inverter starts up.
Build up a magnetic field inside the inverter to
improve the torque performance during the starting
process.
0.300s ○

71
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The setting time:0.000~10.000s
P03.26 Reserved ●
P03.27 Reserved ●
P03.28 Reserved ●
P03.29 Reserved ●
P04 Group V/F control
P04.00
Motor 1V/F
curve setting
These function codes define the V/F curve of
Goodrive300 motor 1 to meet the need of different
loads.
0:Straight line V/F curve；applying to the constant
torque load
1:Multi-dots V/F curve
2:1.3th
power low torque V/F curve
3:1.7th
4:2.0th
Curves 2~4 apply to the torque loads such as fans
and water pumps. Users can adjust according to the
features of the loads to achieve a best energy-saving
effect.
5:Customized V/F(V/F separation)；On this mode, V
can be separated from f and f can be adjusted
through the frequency given channel set by P00.06
or the voltage given channel set by P04.27 to
change the feature of the curve.
Note: Vb in the below picture is the motor rated
voltage and fb is the motor rated frequency.
0 ◎

72
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P04.01
Motor 1
torque boost
Torque boost to the output voltage for the features of
low frequency torque. P04.01 is for the Max. Output
voltage Vb.
P04.02 defines the percentage of closing frequency
of manual torque to fb.
Torque boost should be selected according to the
load. The bigger the load is, the bigger the torque is.
Too big torque boost is inappropriate because the
motor will run with over magnetic, and the current of
the inverter will increase to add the temperature of
the inverter and decrease the efficiency.
When the torque boost is set to 0.0%, the inverter is
automatic torque boost.
Torque boost threshold: below this frequency point,
the torque boost is effective, but over this frequency
point, the torque boost is ineffective.
The setting range of
P04.01:0.0%:(automatic)0.1%~10.0%
0.0% ○
P04.02
Motor 1
torque boost
close
20.0% ○

73
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The setting range of P04.02:0.0%~50.0%
P04.03
Motor 1V/F
Frequency
point 1
When P04.00 =1, the user can set V//F curve
through P04.03~P04.08.
V/F is generally set according to the load of the
motor.
Note:V1 ＜ V2 ＜ V3,f1 ＜ f2 ＜ f3. Too high low
frequency voltage will heat the motor excessively or
damage. The inverter may occur the overcurrent
speed or overcurrent protection.
The setting range of P04.03: 0.00Hz~P04.05
The setting range of P04.04:0.0%~110.0%
The setting range of P04.05:P04.03~ P04.07
The setting range of P04.06:0.0%~110.0%(the rated
voltage of motor 1)
The setting range of P04.07:P04.05~ P02.02(the
rated frequency of motor 1) or P04.05~ P02.16(the
rated frequency of motor 1)
The setting range of P04.08:0.0%~110.0%(the rated
voltage of motor 1)
0.00Hz ○
P04.04
Motor 1V/F
Voltage
point 1
00.0% ○
P04.05
Motor 1V/F
Frequency
point 2
00.00Hz ○
P04.06
Motor 1V/F
voltage point
2
00.0% ○
P04.07
Motor 1V/F
Frequency
point 3
00.00Hz ○
P04.08
Motor 1V/F
voltage point
3
00.0% ○
P04.09
Motor 1 V/F
slip
compensatio
This function code is used to compensate the
change of the rotation speed caused by load during
compensation V/F control to improve the rigidity of
0.0% ○

74
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
n gain the motor. It can be set to the rated slip frequency of
the motor which is counted as below:
△f=fb-n*p/60
Of which, fb is the rated frequency of the motor, its
function code is P02.01; n is the rated rotating speed
of the motor and its function code is P02.02；p is the
pole pair of the motor. 100.0% corresponds to the
rated slip frequency△f.
Setting range:0.0~200.0%
P04.10
Motor 1 low
frequency
vibration
control factor
In the V/F control mode, current fluctuation may
occur to the motor on some frequency, especially the
motor with big power. The motor can not run stably
or overcurrent may occur. These phenomena can be
canceled by adjusting this parameter.
The setting range of P04.10:0~100
The setting range of P04.12:0.00Hz~P00.03(the
Max. frequency)
10 ○
P04.11
Motor 1 high
frequency
vibration
control factor
10 ○
P04.12
Motor 1
vibration
control
threshold
30.00 Hz ○
P04.13
Motor 2 V/F
curve setting
This group of parameters defines the V/F setting
means of Goodrive300 motor 2 to meet the features
of different loads. See P04.00~P04.12 for the
detailed function code instruction.
Note:P04 group contains two sets of V/F parameters
of the motor which cannot display simultaneously.
Only the selected V/F parameter can be shown. The
motor selection can be defined by terminals function
“the shift between motor 1 and motor 2”
0 ◎
P04.14
Motor 2
torque boost
0.0% ○
P04.15
Motor 2
torque
threshold
20.0% ○
P04.16
Motor 2V/F
frequency
point 1
0.00Hz ○

75
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P04.17
Motor 2V/F
voltage point
1
00.0% ○
P04.18
Motor 2V/F
frequency
point 2
00.00Hz ○
P04.19
Motor 2V/F
voltage point
2
00.0% ○
P04.20
Motor 2V/F
frequency
point 3
00.00Hz ○
P04.21
Motor 2V/F
voltage point
3
00.0% ○
P04.22
Motor 2 V/F
slip
compensatio
n gain
0.0% ○
P04.23
Motor 2 low
frequency
vibration
control factor
In the V/F control mode, current fluctuation may
occur to the motor on some frequency, especially the
motor with big power. The motor can not run stably
or overcurrent may occur. These phenomena can be
canceled by adjusting this parameter.
The setting range of P04.25:0.00Hz~P00.03(the
Max. frequency)
10 ○
P04.24
Motor 2 high
frequency
vibration
control factor
10 ○
P04.25
Motor 2
vibration
control
threshold
30.00 Hz ○

76
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P04.26
energy-savin
g operation
selection
0:No operation
1:Automatic energy-saving operation
Motor on the light load conditions, automatically
adjusts the output voltage to save energy
0 ◎
P04.27
Voltage
Setting
Channel
selection
Select the output setting channel at V/F curve
separation.
0:Keypad setting voltage: the output voltage is
determined by P04.28.
1:AI1 setting voltage ；
2:AI2 setting voltage；
4:HDI1 setting voltage；
5:Multi-stage speed setting voltage；
6:PID setting voltage；
7:MODBUS communication setting voltage；
8:PROFIBUS communication setting voltage；
9:Ethernet communication setting voltage ；
(Reversed)
10:CAN communication setting voltage；(Reversed)
Note:100% corresponds to the rated voltage of the
motor.
0 ○
P04.28
Keypad
setting
voltage
The function code is the voltage digital set value
when the voltage setting channel is selected as
“keypad selection”
The setting range:0.0%~100.0%
100.0% ○
P04.29
Voltage
increasing
time
Voltage increasing time is the time when the inverter
accelerates from the output minimum voltage to the
output maximum voltage.
Voltage decreasing time is the time when the inverter
decelerates from the output maximum voltage to the
output minimum voltage.
5.0s ○
P04.30
Voltage
decreasing
time
5.0s ○

77
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The setting range:0.0~3600.0s
P04.31
Output
maximum
voltage
Set the upper and low limit of the output voltage.
The setting range of P04.31:P04.32~100.0%(the
rated voltage of the motor)
The setting range of P04.32:0.0%~ P04.31(the rated
voltage of the motor)
100.0% ◎
P04.32
Output
minimum
voltage
0.0% ◎
P04.33 Reserved ●
P04.34 Reserved ●
P04.35 Reserved ●
P05 Group Input terminals
P05.00
HDI input
type
selection
0:HDI is high pulse input. See P05.49~P05.54
1:HDI is switch input
0 ◎
P05.01
S1 terminals
function
selection
0: No function
1: Forward rotation operation
2: Reverse rotation operation
3: 3-wire control operation
4: Forward rotation jogging
5: Reverse rotation jogging
6: Coast to stop
7: Fault reset
8: Operation pause
1 ◎
P05.02
S2 terminals
function
selection
4 ◎
P05.03
S3 terminals
function
selection
7 ◎

78
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P05.04
S4 terminals
function
selection
9: External fault input
10:Increasing frequency setting(UP)
11:Decreasing frequency setting(DOWN)
12:Cancel the frequency change setting
13:Shift between A setting and B setting
14:Shift between combination setting and A setting
15:Shift between combination setting and B setting
16:Multi-stage speed terminal 1
19:Multi- stage speed terminal 4
20:Multi- stage speed pause
21:ACC/DEC time option１
22:ACC/DEC time option２
23:Simple PLC stop reset
24:Simple PLC pause
25:PID control pause
26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current frequency)
27:Traverse reset(return to the center frequency)
28:Counter reset
29:Torque control prohibition
30:ACC/DEC prohibition
31:Counter trigger
32:Length reset
33:Cancel the frequency change setting temporarily
34:DC brake
35:Shift the motor 1 into motor 2
36:Shift the command to the keypad
37:Shift the command to the terminals
38:Shift the command to the communication
39:Pre-magnetized command
0 ◎
P05.05
S5 terminals
function
selection
0 ◎
P05.06
S6 terminals
function
selection
0 ◎
P05.07
S7 terminals
function
selection
0 ◎
P05.08
S8 terminals
function
selection
0 ◎
P05.09
HDI
terminals
function
selection
0 ◎

79
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
40:Clear the power
41:Keep the power
42~63:Reserved
P05.10
Polarity
selection of
the input
terminals
The function code is used to set the polarity of the
input terminals.
Set the bit to 0, the input terminal is anode.
Set the bit to 1, the input terminal is cathode.
BIT0 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 BIT9
S6 S7 S8 HDI
The setting range:0x000~0x1FF
0x000 ○
P05.11
Switch filter
time
Set the sample filter time of S1~S8 and HDI
terminals. If the interference is strong, increase the
parameter to avoid the disoperation.
0.000~1.000s
0.010s ○
P05.12
Virtual
terminals
setting
Enable the input function of virtual terminals at the
communication mode.
0:Virtual terminals is invalid
1:MODBUS communication virtual terminals are
valid
2:PROFIBUS communication virtual terminals are
valid
0 ◎
P05.13
Terminals
control
running
mode
Set the operation mode of the terminals control
0:2-wire control 1, comply the enable with the
direction. This mode is widely used. It determines
the rotation direction by the defined FWD and REV
terminals command.
0 ◎

80
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1:2-wire control 2；Separate the enable from the
direction. FWD defined by this mode is the enabling
ones. The direction depends on the state of the
defined REV.
2:3-wire control 1; Sin is the enabling terminal on this
mode, and the running command is caused by FWD
and the direction is controlled by REV. Sin is
natural closed.
3:3-wire control 2; Sin is the enabling terminal on this
mode, and the running command is caused by SB1
or SB3 and both of them control the running

81
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
direction.NC SB2 generates the stop command.
Note: for the 2-wire running mode, when FWD/REV
terminal is effective, the inverter stop because of the
stopping command from other sources, even the
control terminal FWD/REV keeps effective; the
inverter won’t work when the stopping command is
canceled. Only when FWD/REV is relaunched, the
inverter can start again. For example, the effective
STOP/RSTstop when PLC signal cycles stop,
fixed-length stop and terminal control (see P07.04).
P05.14
S1 terminal
switching on
delay time
The function code defines the corresponding delay
time of electrical level of the programmable terminals
from switching on to switching off.
Setting range:0.000~50.000s
0.000s ○
P05.15
S1
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.16
S2 terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.17
S2
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○

82
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P05.18
S3 terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.19
S3
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.20
S4 terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.21
S4
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.22
S5
terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.23
S5
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.24
S6
terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.25
S6
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.26 S7 0.000s ○

83
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
terminal
switching on
delay time
P05.27
S7
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.28
S8
terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.29
S8
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.30
HDI
terminal
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.31
HDI
terminal
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P05.32
Lower limit of
AI1
The function code defines the relationship between
the analog input voltage and its corresponding set
value. If the analog input voltage beyond the set
minimum or maximum input value, the inverter will
count at the minimum or maximum one.
When the analog input is the current input, the
corresponding voltage of 0~20mA is 0~10V.
In different cases, the corresponding rated value of
0.00V ○
P05.33
Correspondi
ng setting of
the lower
limit of AI1
0.0% ○
P05.34
Upper limit of
AI1
10.00V ○

84
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P05.35
Correspondi
ng setting of
the upper
limit of AI1
100.0% is different. See the application for detailed
information.
The figure below illustrates different applications:
Input filter time: this parameter is used to adjust the
sensitivity of the analog input. Increasing the value
properly can enhance the anti-interference of the
analog, but weaken the sensitivity of the analog input
Note: Analog AI1 and AI2 can support 0~10V or
0~20mA input,when AI1 and AI2 selects 0~20mA
input, the corresponding voltage of 20mA is 5V. AI3
can support the output of -10V~+10V.
The setting range of P05.32:0.00V~P05.34
The setting range of P05.33:-100.0%~100.0%
The setting range of P05.34:P05.32~10.00V
The setting range of P05.36:0.000s~10.000s
The setting range of P05.37:0.00V~P05.39
100.0% ○
P05.36
AI1 input
filter time
0.100s ○
P05.37
Lower limit of
AI2
0.00V ○
P05.38
Correspondi
ng setting of
the lower
limit of AI2
0.0% ○
P05.39
Upper limit of
AI2
10.00V ○
P05.40
Correspondi
ng setting of
the upper
limit of AI2
100.0% ○
P05.41
AI2 input
filter time
0.100s ○
P05.42
Lower limit of
AI3
-10.00V ○
P05.43
Correspondi
ng setting of
the lower
limit of AI3
-100.0% ○
P05.44
middle value
of AI3
0.00V ○
P05.45
Correspondi
ng middle
setting of
0.0% ○

85
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
AI3 The setting range of P05.40:-100.0%~100.0%
The setting range of P05.42:-10.00V~P05.44
The setting range of P05.44:P05.42~P05.46
P05.46
Upper limit of
AI3
10.00V ○
P05.47
Correspondi
ng setting of
the upper
limit of AI3
100.0% ○
P05.48
AI3 input
filter time
0.100s ○
P05.49
HDI
high-speed
pulse input
function
selection
The function selection when HDI terminals is
high-speed pulse input
0:Frequency setting input, frequency setting source
1:Counter input, high-speed pulse counter input
terminals
2:Length counting input, length counter input
terminals
0 ◎
P05.50
Lower limit
frequency of
HDI
0.00 KHz ~ P05.52 0.00KHz ○
P05.51
Correspondi
ng setting of
HDI low
frequency
setting
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
P05.52
Upper limit
frequency of
HDI
P05.50 ~50.00KHz
50.00KH
z
○
P05.53
Correspondi
ng setting of
upper limit
frequency of
-100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

86
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
HDI
P05.54
HDI
frequency
input filter
time
0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○
P06 Group Output terminals
P06.00
HDO output
type
The function selection of the high-speed pulse output
terminals.
0:Open collector pole high speed pulse output: The
Max.pulse frequency is 50.0kHz. See
P06.27~P06.31 for detailed information of the
related functions.
1: Open collector pole output. See P06.02 for
detailed information of the related functions.
0 ◎
P06.01
Y output
selection
0:Invalid
1:On operation
2:Forward rotation operation
3:Reverse rotation operation
4: Jogging operation
5:The inverter fault
6:Frequency degree test FDT1
7:Frequency degree test FDT2
8:Frequency arrival
9:Zero speed running
10:Upper limit frequency arrival
11:Lower limit frequency arrival
12:Ready for operation
13:Pre-magnetizing
14:Overload pre-alarm
15: Underload pre-alarm
16:Completion of simple PLC stage
0 ○
P06.02
HDO output
selection
0 ○
P06.03
Relay RO1
output
selection
1 ○
P06.04
Relay RO2
output
selection
5 ○

87
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
17:Completion of simple PLC cycle
18:Setting count value arrival
19:Defined count value arrival
20:External fault valid
21:Length arrival
22:Running time arrival
23:MODBUS communication virtual terminals output
24:PROFIBUS communication virtual terminals
output
25~30:Reserved
P06.05
Polarity
selection of
output
terminals
The function code is used to set the pole of the
output terminal.
When the current bit is set to 0, input terminal is
positive.
When the current bit is set to 1, input terminal is
negative.
BIT0 BIT1 BIT2 BIT3
Y HDO RO1 RO2
Setting range:00~0F
00 ○
P06.06
Y switching
on delay time
The function code defines the corresponding delay
time of the electrical level change during the
programmable terminal switching on and off.
The setting range :0.000~50.000s
Note:P06.08 and P06.08 are valid only when
P06.00=1.
0.000s ○
P06.07
Y switching
off delay time
0.000s ○
P06.08
HDO
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P06.09
HDO
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P06.10
RO1
switching on
0.000s ○

88
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
delay time
P06.11
RO1
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P06.12
RO2
switching on
delay time
0.000s ○
P06.13
RO2
switching off
delay time
0.000s ○
P06.14
AO1 output
selection
0:Running frequency
1:Set frequency
2:Ramp reference frequency
3:Running rotation speed
4:Output current (relative to the rated current of the
inverter)
5:Output current(relative to the rated current of the
motor)
6:Output voltage
7:Output power
8:Set torque value
9:Output torque
10:Analog AI1 input value
13:High speed pulse HDI input value
14:MODBUS communication set value 1
16:PROFIBUS communication set value 1
17:PROFIBUS communication set value 2
18:Torque current(relative to the rated current of the
0 ○
P06.15
AO2 output
selection
0 ○
P06.16
HDO
high-speed
pulse output
selection
0 ○

89
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
motor)
19:Pre-magnetizing current(relative to the rated
current of the motor)
20:Reserved
P06.17
Lower limit of
AO1 output
The above function codes define the relative
relationship between the output value and analog
output. When the output value exceeds the range of
set maximum or minimum output, it will count
according to the low-limit or upper-limit output.
When the analog output is current output, 1mA
equals to 0.5V.
In different cases, the corresponding analog output
of 100% of the output value is different. Please refer
to each application for detailed information.
10V(20mA)
0.0% 100.0%
A
O
Setting range of P06.18 0.00V~10.00V
Setting range of P06.19 P06.17~100.0%
Setting range of P06.21 0.000s~10.000s
Setting range of P06.22 0.0%~P06.24
Setting range of P06.27 0.0%~P06.29
Setting range of P06.28 0.00~50.00kHz
0.0% ○
P06.18
Correspondi
ng AO1
output to the
lower limit
0.00V ○
P06.19
Upper limit of
AO1 output
100.0% ○
P06.20
The
correspondin
g AO1 output
to the upper
limit
10.00V ○
P06.21
AO1 output
filter time
0.000s ○
P06.22
Lower limit of
AO2 output
0.0% ○
P06.23
Correspondi
ng AO2
output to the
lower limit
0.00V ○
P06.24
Upper limit of
AO2 output
100.0% ○
P06.25
Correspondi
ng AO2
output to the
upper limit
10.00V ○

90
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P06.26
AO2 output
filter time
Setting range of P06.30 0.00~50.00kHz
0.000s ○
P06.27
Lower limit of
HDO output
0.00% ○
P06.28
Correspondi
ng HDO
output to the
lower limit
0.0kHz ○
P06.29
Upper limit of
HDO output
100.0% ○
P06.30
Correspondi
ng HDO
output to the
upper limit
50.00kHz ○
P06.31
HDO output
filter time
0.000s ○
P07 Group Human-Machine Interface
P07.00
User’s
password
0~65535
The password protection will be valid when setting
any non-zero number.
00000:Clear the previous user’s password, and
make the password protection invalid.
After the user’s password becomes valid, if the
password is incorrect, users cannot enter the
parameter menu. Only correct password can make
the user check or modify the parameters. Please
remember all users’ passwords.
Retreat editing state of the function codes and the
password protection will become valid in 1 minute. If
the password is available, press PRG/ESCto enter
into the editing state of the function codes, and then
0 ○

91
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
“0.0.0.0.0” will be displayed. Unless input right
password, the operator can not enter into it.
Note: restoring to the default value can clear the
password, please use it with caution.
P07.01
Function
parameter
copy
The function code determines the mode of
parameters copy.
0:No operation
1:Upload the local function parameter to the keypad
2:Download the keypad function parameter to local
address(including the motor parameters)
3:Download the keypad function parameter to local
address (excluding the motor parameter of P02, P12
group)
4:Download the keypad function parameters to local
address (only for the motor parameter of P02,P12
group)
Note:After completing the 1~4 operation,the
parameter will come back to 0 automatically,the
function of upload and download excludes the
factory parameters of P29.
0 ◎
P07.02
QUICK/JOG
function
selection
0:No function
1:Jogging running. Press QUICK/JOG to
realizes the jogging running.
2:Shift the display state by the shifting key. Press
QUICK/JOGto shift the displayed function code from
right to left.
3:Shift between forward rotations and reverse
rotations. Press QUICK/JOG to shift the direction of
the frequency commands. This function is only valid
in the keypad commands channels.
4:Clear UP/DOWN settings. Press QUICK/JOG to
1 ◎

92
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
clear the set value of UP/DOWN.
5: Coast to stop. Press QUICK/JOG to coast to stop.
6: Shift the running commands source. Press
QUICK/JOG to shift the running commands source.
7:Quick commission mode(committee according to
the non-factory parameter)
Note: Press QUICK/JOGto shift between forward
rotation and reverse rotation, the inverter does not
record the state after shifting during powering off.
The inverter will run according to parameter P00.13
during next powering on.
P07.03
QUICK/JOG
the shifting
sequence
selection of
running
command
channel
When P07.06=6, set the shifting sequence of
running command channels.
0:Keypad control→terminals control
→communication control
1:Keypad control←→terminals control
2:Keypad control←→communication control
3:Terminals control←→communication control
0 ○
P07.04
STOP/RST
stop function
Select the stop function by STOP/RST. STOP/RST
is effective in any state for the fault reset.
0:Only valid for the panel control
1:Both valid for panel and terminals control
2:Both valid for panel and communication control
3:Valid for all control modes
0 ○
P07.05
The
parameter
selection1 of
running state
0x0000~0xFFFF
BIT0:running frequency (Hz on)
BIT1:set frequency(Hz flickering)
BIT2:bus voltage (Hz on)
BIT3:output voltage(V on)
BIT4:output current(A on)
BIT5:running rotation speed (rpm on)
0x03FF ○

93
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
BIT6:output power(% on)
BIT7:output torque(% on)
BIT8:PID reference(% flickering)
BIT9:PID feedback value(% on)
BIT10:input terminals state
BIT11:output terminals state
BIT12:torque set value(% on)
BIT13:pulse counter value
BIT14:length value
BIT15:PLC and the current stage in multi-stage
speed
P07.06
The
parameter
selection2 of
running state
0x0000~0xFFFF
BIT0: analog AI1 value (V on)
BIT3: high speed pulse HDI frequency
BIT4: motor overload percentage (% on)
BIT5: the inverter overload percentage (% on)
BIT6: ramp frequency given value(Hz on)
BIT7: linear speed
BIT8: AC inlet current (A on)
BIT9~15:reserved
0x0000
P07.07
The
parameter
selection of
the stop
state
0x0000~0xFFFF
BIT0:set frequency(Hz on, frequency flickering
slowly)
BIT1:bus voltage (V on)
BIT2:input terminals state
BIT3:output terminals state
BIT4:PID reference (% flickering)
BIT5:PID feedback value(% flickering)
BIT6:torque reference(% flickering)
0x00FF ○

94
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
BIT7:analog AI1 value(V on)
BIT8:analog AI2 value(V on)
BIT9: analog AI3 value(V on)
BIT10:high speed pulse HDI frequency
BIT11:PLC and the current stage in multi-stage
speed
BIT12:pulse counters
BIT13:length value
BIT14~BIT15:reserved
P07.08
Frequency
display
coefficient
0.01~10.00
Displayed frequency=running frequency* P07.08
1.00 ○
P07.09
Rotation
speed
coefficient
0.1~999.9%
Mechanical rotation speed =120*displayed running
frequency×P07.09/motor pole pairs
100.0% ○
P07.10
Linear speed
displayed
coefficient
0.1~999.9%
Linear speed= Mechanical rotation speed×P07.10
1.0% ○
P07.11
Rectifier
bridge
module
temperature
-20.0~120.0℃ ●
P07.12
Inverter
module
temperature
-20.0~120.0℃ ●
P07.13
Software
version
1.00~655.35 ●
P07.14
Local
accumulative
running time
0~65535h ●
P07.15 High power Display the power used by the inverter. ●

95
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
consumption
of the
inverter
The power consumption of the inverter
=P07.15*1000+P07.16
Setting range of P07.15: 0~65535°(*1000)
Setting range of P07.16: 0.0~999.9°
P07.16
Low power
consumption
of the
inverter
●
P07.17 Reserved Reserved ●
P07.18
The rated
power of the
inverter
0.4~3000.0kW ●
P07.19
The rated
voltage of
the inverter
50~1200V ●
P07.20
The rated
current of the
inverter
0.1~6000.0A ●
P07.21
Factory bar
code 1
0x0000~0xFFFF ●
P07.22
Factory bar
code 2
0x0000~0xFFFF ●
P07.23
Factory bar
code 3
0x0000~0xFFFF ●
P07.24
Factory bar
code 4
0x0000~0xFFFF ●
P07.25
Factory bar
code 5
0x0000~0xFFFF ●
P07.26
Factory bar
code 6
0x0000~0xFFFF ●

96
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P07.27
Current fault
type
0:No fault
1:IGBT U phase protection(OUt1)
2:IGBT V phase protection(OUt2)
3:IGBT W phase protection(OUt3)
4:OC1
5:OC2
6:OC3
7:OV1
8:OV2
9:OV3
10:UV
11:Motor overload(OL1)
12:The inverter overload(OL2)
13:Input side phase loss(SPI)
14:Output side phase loss(SPO)
15:Overheat of the rectifier module(OH1)
16:Overheat fault of the inverter module(OH2)
17:External fault(EF)
18:485 communication fault(CE)
19:Current detection fault(ItE)
20:Motor antotune fault(tE)
21:EEPROM operation fault(EEP)
22:PID response offline fault(PIDE)
23:Braking unit fault(bCE)
24:Running time arrival(END)
25:Electrical overload(OL3)
26:Panel communication fault(PCE)
27:Parameter uploading fault (UPE)
28:Parameter downloading fault(DNE)
29:Profibus communication fault(E-DP)
30:Ethernet communication fault(E-NET)
●
P07.28
Previous
fault type
●
P07.29
Previous 2
fault type
●
P07.30
Previous 3
fault type
●
P07.31
Previous 4
fault type
●
P07.32
Previous 5
fault type
●

97
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
31:CAN communication fault(E-CAN)
32:Grounding short circuit fault 1(ETH1)
34:Speed deviation fault(dEu)
35:Maladjustment(STu)
36: Undervoltage fault(LL)
P07.33
Current fault
running
frequency
0.00Hz ●
P07.34
Ramp given
frequency at
current fault
0.00Hz
P07.35
Output
voltage at
the current
fault
0V
P07.36
Current fault
output
current
0.0A
P07.37
Current fault
bus voltage
0.0V
P07.38
The Max.
temperature
at Current
fault
0.0℃
P07.39
Input
terminals
state at the
current fault
0
●
P07.40
Output
terminals
0
●

98
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
state at the
current fault
P07.41
Previous
fault running
frequency
0.00Hz
●
P07.42
Ramp
reference
frequency at
previous fault
0.00Hz
●
P07.43
Output
voltage at
the previous
fault
0V
●
P07.44
The output
current at the
previous fault
0.0A
●
P07.45
Bus voltage
at the
previous fault
0.0V
●
P07.46
The Max.
temperature
at the
previous fault
0.0℃
●
P07.47
Input
terminals
state at the
previous fault
0
●
P07.48
Output
terminals
state at the
previous fault
0
●

99
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P07.49
Previous 2
fault runnig
frequency y
0.00Hz
●
P07.50
Output
voltage at
the previous
2 faults
0.00Hz
●
P07.51
Output
current at the
previous 2
faults
0V
●
P07.52
Output
current at the
previous 2
fault
0.0A ●
P07.53
Bus voltage
at the
previous 2
fault
0.0V
●
P07.54
The Max.
temperature
at previous 2
fault
0.0℃
●
P07.55
Input
terminals
state at
previous 2
fault
0
●
P07.56
Output
terminals
state at
0
●

100
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
previous 2
fault
P08 Group Enhanced function
P08.00 ACC time 2
Refer to P00.11 and P00.12 for detailed definition.
Goodrive300 series define four groups of ACC/DEC
time which can be selected by P5 group. The first
group of ACC/DEC time is the factory default one.
Depend
on
module
○
P08.01 DEC time 2
Depend
on
module
○
P08.02 ACC time 3
Depend
on
module
○
P08.03 DEC time 3
Depend
on
module
○
P08.04 ACC time 4
Depend
on
module
○
P08.05 DEC time 4
Depend
on
module
○
P08.06
Jogging
running
frequency
This parameter is used to define the reference
frequency during jogging.
Setting range: 0.00Hz ~P00.03(the Max. frequency)
5.00Hz ○
P08.07
Jogging
running ACC
time
The jogging ACC time means the time needed if the
inverter runs from 0Hz to the Max. Frequency.
The jogging DEC time means the time needed if the
inverter goes from the Max. Frequency (P0.03) to
0Hz.
Depend
on
module
○
P08.08
Jogging
running DEC
time
Depend
on
module
○
P08.09 Jumping When the set frequency is in the range of jumping 0.00Hz ○

101
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
frequency 1 frequency, the inverter will run at the edge of the
jumping frequency.
The inverter can avoid the mechanical resonance
point by setting the jumping frequency. The inverter
can set three jumping frequency. But this function
will be invalid if all jumping points are 0.
Setting range: 0.00~P00.03(the Max. frequency)
P08.10
jumping
frequency
range 1
0.00Hz ○
P08.11
Jumping
frequency 2
0.00Hz ○
P08.12
Jumping
frequency
range 2
0.00Hz ○
P08.13
Jumping
frequency 3
0.00Hz ○
P08.14
Jumping
frequency
range 3
0.00Hz ○
P08.15
Traverse
range
This function applies to the industries where traverse
and convolution function are required such as textile
and chemical fiber.
The traverse function means that the output
frequency of the inverter is fluctuated with the set
frequency as its center. The route of the running
frequency is illustrated as below, of which the
traverse is set by P08.15 and when P08.15 is set as
0, the traverse is 0 with no function.
Traverse range:The traverse running is limited by
upper and low frequency.
0.0% ○
P08.16
Sudden
jumping
frequency
range
0.0% ○
P08.17
Traverse
boost time
5.0s ○
P08.18
Traverse
declining
time
5.0s ○

102
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The traverse range relative to the center frequency:
traverse range AW ＝ center frequency × traverse
range P08.15.
Sudden jumping frequency＝traverse range AW×
sudden jumping frequency range P08.16. When run
at the traverse frequency, the value which is relative
to the sudden jumping frequency.
The raising time of the traverse frequency:The time
from the lowest point to the highest one.
The declining time of the traverse frequency :The
time from the highest point to the lowest one.
The setting range of P08.15: 0.0~100.0%(relative to
the set frequency)
The setting range of P08.16: 0.0~50.0%(relative to
the traverse range)
P08.19
Setting
length
The function codes of setting length, actual length
and unit pulse are mainly used to control the fixed
length.
The length is counted by the pulse signal of HDI
terminals input and the HDI terminals are needed to
set as the length counting input.
Actual length＝the length counting input pulse /unit
pulse
When the actual length P08.20 exceeds the setting
length P08.19, the multi-function digital output
terminals will output ON.
Setting range of P08.19: 0~65535m
Setting range of P08.20:0~65535m
Setting range of P08.21:1~10000
0m ○
P08.20 Actual length 0m ●
P08.21
Pulse per
rotation
1 ○
P08.22
Alxe
perimeter
10.00cm ○
P08.23 Length ratio 1.000 ○
P08.24
Length
correcting
coefficient
1.000 ○

103
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range of P08.22:0.01~100.00cm
Setting range of P08.23:0.001~10.000
Setting range of P08.24:0.001~1.000
P08.25
Setting
counting
value
The counter works by the input pulse signals of the
HDI terminals.
When the counter achieves a fixed number, the
multi-function output terminals will output the signal
of “fixed counting number arrival” and the counter go
on working; when the counter achieves a setting
number, the multi-function output terminals will
output the signal of “setting counting number arrival”,
the counter will clear all numbers and stop to recount
before the next pulse.
The setting counting value P08.26 should be no
more than the setting counting value P08.25.
The function is illustrated as below:
Setting range of P08.25:P08.26~65535
Setting range of P08.26:0~P08.25
0 ○
P08.26
Given
counting
value
0 ○
P08.27
Setting
running time
Pre-set running time of the inverter. When the
accumulative running time achieves the set time, the
multi-function digital output terminals will output the
signal of “running time arrival”.
Setting range:0~65535m
0m ○
P08.28
Time of fault
reset
The time of the fault reset: set the fault reset time by
selecting this function. If the reset time exceeds this
set value, the inverter will stop for the fault and wait
to be repaired.
The interval time of the fault reset:The interval
0 ○
P08.29
Interval time
of automatic
fault reset
1.0s ○

104
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
between the time when the fault occurs and the time
when the reset action occurs.
Setting range of P08.28:0~10
Setting range of P08.29:0.1~100.0s
P08.30
Dropping
control the
frequency
decreasing
ratio
The output frequency of the inverter changes as the
load. And it is mainly used to balance the power
when several inverters drive one load.
Setting range:0.00~10.00Hz
0.00Hz ○
P08.31
The shifting
channel
between
motor 1 and
motor 2
Goodrive300 supports the shift between two motors.
This function is used to select the shifting channel.
0:Terminals shifting, the digital terminal is selected
as 35
1:MODBUS communication shifting
2:PROFIBUS communication shifting
0 ◎
P08.32
FDT1
electrical
level
detection
value When the output frequency exceeds the
corresponding frequency of FDT electrical level, the
multi-function digital output terminals will output the
signal of “frequency level detect FDT” until the output
frequency decreases to a value lower than (FDT
electrical level—FDT retention detection value) the
corresponding frequency, the signal is invalid. Below
is the waveform diagram:
50.00Hz ○
P08.33
FDT1
retention
detection
value
5.0% ○
P08.34
FDT2
electrical
level
detection
value
50.00Hz ○
P08.35
FDT2
retention
5.0% ○

105
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
detection
value
Setting range of P08.32: 0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max.
frequency)
Setting range of P08.33: 0.0~100.0%(FDT1
electrical level)
Setting range of P08.34: 0.00~P00.03(the Max.
frequency)
Setting range of P08.35: 0.0~100.0%(FDT2
electrical level)
P08.36
Frequency
arrival
detection
value
When the output frequency is among the below or
above range of the set frequency, the multi-function
digital output terminal will output the signal of
“frequency arrival”, see the diagram below for
detailed information:
0.00Hz ○

106
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The setting range:0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max.
frequency)
P08.37
Energy
Braking
enable
This parameter is used to control the internal braking
unit.
0:Disable
1:Enable
Note:Only applied to internal braking unit.
0 ○
P08.38
Energy
Braking
threshold
voltage
After setting the original bus voltage, adjust this
parameter to brake the load appropriately. The
factory value changes with voltage level.
The setting range:200.0~2000.0V
220V
voltage:3
80.0V
○
380V
voltage:7
00.0V
660V
voltage:1
120.0V
P08.39
Cooling fan
running
mode
0:Rated running mode
1:The fan keeps on running after power on
0 ○
P08.40
PWM
selection
0:PWM mode 1, 3-phase commission and 2-phase
commission
0
◎

107
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1:PWM mode 2, 3-phase commission
P08.41
Over
commission
selection
0:Invalid
1:Valid
1 ◎
P08.42
Keypad data
control
setting
0x000~0x1223
LED ones:frequency enable selection
0:Both ∧ / ∨ keys and digital potentiometer
adjustments are effective
1:Only ∧/∨ keys adjustments is effective
2:Only digital potentiometer adjustments is effective
3:Neither ∧ / ∨ keys nor digital potentiometer
adjustments are effective
LED tens: frequency control selection
0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0
1:Effective for all frequency setting manner
2:Ineffective for multi-stage speed when multi-stage
speed has the priority
LED hundreds: action selection during stopping
0:Setting is valid
1:Valid during running, cleared after stopping
2:Valid during running, cleared after receiving the
stop command
LED thousands: ∧ / ∨ keys and digital
potentiometer Integral function
0:The Integral function is valid
1:The Integral function is invalid
0x0000 ○
P08.43
Keypad data
potentiomete
r integral
ratio
0.01~10.00s 0.10s ○
P08.44 UP/DOWN 0x00~0x221 0x000 ○

108
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
terminals
control
setting
LED ones: frequency control selection
0:UP/DOWN terminals setting effective
1:UP/DOWN terminals setting ineffective
0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0
1:All frequency means are effective
2:When the multi-stage are priority, it is ineffective to
the multi-stage
LED hundreds: action selection when stop
0:Setting effective
1:Effective in the running, clear after stop
2:Effective in the running, clear after receiving the
stop commands
P08.45
UP terminals
frequency
increasing
integral ratio
0.01~50.00Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s ○
P08.46
DOWN
terminals
frequency
integral ratio
0.01~50.00 Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s ○
P08.47
Action
selection
when the
frequency
setting is off
0x000~0x111
LED ones:The action selection when the digital
adjusting the frequency is off.
0:Save when the power is off
1:Clear when the power is off
LED tens:The action selection when MODBUS set
frequency is off
LED tens:The action selection when the other
0x000 ○

109
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
frequency set frequency is off
P08.48
High position
of original
power
consumption
This parameter is used to set the original value of the
power comsumotion.
The original value of the power consumption
=P08.48*1000+ P08.49
Setting range of P08.48: 0~59999°(k)
Setting range of P08.49:0.0~999.9°
0° ○
P08.49
Low position
of original
power
consumption
0.0° ○
P08.50
Magnetic flux
braking
This function code is used to enable magnetic flux.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
This inverter can slow down the motor by increasing
the magnetic flux. The energy generated by the
motor during braking can be transformed into heat
energy by increasing the magnetic flux.
The inverter monitors the state of the motor
continuously even during the magnetic flux period.
So the magnetic flux can be used in the motor stop,
as well as to change the rotation speed of the motor.
Its other advantages are:
Brake immediately after the stop command. It does
not need to wait the magnetic flux weaken.
The cooling is better. The current of the stator other
than the rotor increases during magnetic flux
braking, while the cooling of the stator is more
effective than the rotor.
0 ●
P08.51
Input power
factor of the
This function code is used to adjust the displayed
current of the AC input side.
0.56 ○

110
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
inverter Setting range:0.00~1.00
P09 Group PID control
P09.00
PID given
source
selection
When the frequency command selection (P00.06,
P00. 07) is 7 or the voltage setting channel selection
(P04.27) is 6, the running mode of the inverter is
procedure PID controlled.
The parameter determines the target given channel
during the PID procures.
0:Keypad digital given(P09.01)
1:Analog channel AI1 given
3:Analog channel AI3 set
4:High speed pulse HDI set
5:Multi-stage speed set
6:MODBUS communication set
7:PROFIBUS communication set
8:Ethernet communication set
9:CAN communication set
The setting target of procedure PID is a relative one,
100% of the setting equals to 100% of the response
of the controlled system.
The system is calculated according to the relative
value (0~100.0%).
Note:
Multi-stage speed given, it is realized by
setting P10 group parameters.
PROFIBUS communication setting, Ethernet
communication setting and CAN communication
setting need more corresponding extension cards.
0 ○
P09.01
Keypad PID
preset
When P09.00=0, set the parameter whose basic
value is the feedback value of the system.
0.0% ○

111
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
The setting range:-100.0%~100.0%
P09.02
PID
feedback
source
Selection
Select the PID channel by the parameter.
0:Analog channel AI1 feedback
3:High speed HDI feedback
4:MODBUS communication feedback
5:PROFIBUS communication feedback
6:Ethernet communication feedback
7:CAN communication feedback
Note:The given channel and the feedback channel
can not coincide, otherwise, PID can not control
effectively.
0 ○
P09.03
PID output
feature
selection
0:PID output is positive:When the feedback signal
exceeds the PID given value, the output frequency of
the inverter will decrease to balance the PID. For
example, the strain PID control during wrapup
1:PID output is negative:When the feedback signal is
stronger than the PID given value, the output
frequency of the inverter will increase to balance the
PID. For example, the strain PID control during
wrapdown
0 ○
P09.04
Proportional
gain (Kp)
The function is applied to the proportional gain P of
PID input.
P determines the strength of the whole PID adjuster.
The parameter of 100 means that when the offset of
PID feedback and given value is 100%, the adjusting
range of PID adjustor is the Max. Frequency
(ignoring integral function and differential function).
The setting range:0.00~100.00
1.00 ○
P09.05 Interval This parameter determines the speed of PID 0.10s ○

112
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
time(Ti) adjustor to carry out integral adjustment on the
deviation of PID feedback and reference.
When the deviation of PID feedback and reference is
100%, the integral adjustor works continuously after
the time (ignoring the proportional effect and
differential effect) to achieve the Max. Frequency
(P00.03) or the Max. Voltage (P04.31). Shorter the
integral time, stronger is the adjustment
P09.06
Differential
time(Td)
This parameter determines the strength of the
change ratio when PID adjustor carries out integral
adjustment on the deviation of PID feedback and
reference.
If the PID feedback changes 100% during the time,
the adjustment of integral adjustor (ignoring the
proportional effect and differential effect) is the Max.
Frequency (P00.03) or the Max. Voltage (P04.31).
Longer the integral time, stronger is the adjusting.
0.00s ○
P09.07
Sampling
cycle(T)
This parameter means the sampling cycle of the
feedback. The modulator calculates in each
sampling cycle. The longer the sapling cycle is, the
slower the response is.
0.10s ○
P09.08
PID control
deviation
limit
The output of PID system is relative to the maximum
deviation of the close loop reference. As shown in
the diagram below, PID adjustor stops to work during
the deviation limit. Set the function properly to adjust
the accuracy and stability of the system.
0.0% ○

113
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range:0.0~100.0%
P09.09
Output upper
limit of PID
These parameters are used to set the upper and
lower limit of the PID adjustor output.
100.0 % corresponds to Max. Frequency or the Max.
Voltage of ( P04.31)
Setting range of P09.09: P09.10~100.0%
Setting range of P09.10: -100.0%~P09.09
100.0% ○
P09.10
Output lower
limit of PID
0.0% ○
P09.11
Feedback
offline
detection
value
Set the PID feedback offline detection value, when
the detection value is smaller than or equal to the
feedback offline detection value, and the lasting time
exceeds the set value in P09.12, the inverter will
report “PID feedback offline fault” and the keypad will
display PIDE.
Setting range of P09.11: 0.0~100.0%
0.0% ○
P09.12
Feedback
offline
detection
time
1.0s ○

114
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P09.13
PID
adjustment
selection
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0:Keep on integral adjustment when the frequency
achieves the upper and low limit；the integration
shows the change between the reference and the
feedback unless it reaches the internal integral limit.
When the trend between the reference and the
feedback changes, it needs more time to offset the
impact of continuous working and the integration will
change with the trend.
1: Stop integral adjustment when the frequency
reaches the upper and low limit. If the integration
keeps stable, and the trend between the reference
and the feedback changes, the integration will
change with the trend quickly.
LED tens:
0:The same with the setting direction; if the output of
PID adjustment is different from the current running
direction, the internal will output 0 forcedly.
1:Opposite to the setting direction
0x00 ○
P09.14 Reserved ●
P09.15 Reserved ●
P09.16 Reserved ●
P10 Group Simple PLC and multi-stage speed control
P10.00
Simple PLC
means
0:Stop after running once. The inverter has to be
commanded again after finishing a cycle.
1:Run at the final value after running once. After
finish a signal, the inverter will keep the running
frequency and direction of the last run.
2:Cycle running. The inverter will keep on running
until receiving a stop command and then, the system
0 ○

115
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
will stop.
P10.01
Simple PLC
memory
selection
0: Power loss without memory
1:Power loss memory；PLC record the running stage
and frequency when power loss.
0 ○
P10.02
Multi-stage
speed 0
100.0% of the frequency setting corresponds to the
Max. Frequency P00.03.
When selecting simple PLC running, set
P10.02~P10.33 to define the running frequency and
direction of all stages.
Note: The symbol of multi-stage determines the
running direction of simple PLC. The negative value
means reverse rotation.
Multi-stage speeds are in the range of --fmax~fmax and
it can be set continuously.
Goodrive300 series inverters can set 16 stages
speed, selected by the combination of multi-stage
terminals 1~4, corresponding to the speed 0 to
speed 15.
0.0% ○
P10.03
The running
time of stage
0
0.0s ○
P10.04
Multi-stage
speed 1
0.0% ○
P10.05
The running
time of stage
1
0.0s ○
P10.06
Multi-stage
speed 2
0.0% ○
P10.07
The running
time of stage
2
0.0s ○
P10.08
Multi-stage
speed 3
0.0% ○
P10.09
The running
time of stage
3
0.0s ○
P10.10
Multi-stage
speed 4
0.0% ○
P10.11
The running
time of stage
4
0.0s ○
P10.12
Multi-stage
speed 5
0.0% ○

116
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P10.13
The running
time of stage
5
When S1=S2=S3=S4=OFF, the frequency input
manner is selected via code P00.06 or P00.07. when
all S1=S2=S3=S4 terminals aren’t off, it runs at
multi-stage which takes precedence of keypad,
analog value, high-speed pulse, PLC,
communication frequency input. Select at most 16
stages speed via the combination code of S1, S2,
S3, S4.
The start-up and stopping of multi-stage running is
determined by function code P00.06, the relationship
between S1,S2,S3,S4 terminals and multi-stage
speed is as following:
S1 OFF ON OFF ON OFFON OFFON
S2 OFF OFF ON ON OFFOFFON ON
S3 OFF OFF OFF OFFON ON ON ON
S4 OFF OFF OFF OFFOFFOFFOFFOFF
stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
S1 OFF ON OFF ON OFFON OFFON
S2 OFF OFF ON ON OFFOFFON ON
S3 OFF OFF OFF OFFON ON ON ON
S4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
0.0s ○
P10.14
Multi-stage
speed 6
0.0% ○
P10.15
The running
time of stage
6
0.0s ○
P10.16
Multi-stage
speed 7
0.0% ○
P10.17
The running
time of stage
7
0.0s ○
P10.18
Multi-stage
speed 8
0.0% ○
P10.19
The running
time of stage
8
0.0s ○
P10.20
Multi-stage
speed 9
0.0% ○
P10.21
The running
time of stage
9
0.0s ○
P10.22
Multi-stage
speed 10
0.0% ○
P10.23
The running
time of stage
10
0.0s ○
P10.24
Multi-stage
speed 11
0.0% ○
P10.25 The running 0.0s ○

117
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
time of stage
11
stage 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Setting range of P10.(2n,1<n<17): -100.0~100.0%
Setting range of P10.(2n+1,
1<n<17):0.0~6553.5s(min)
P10.26
Multi-stage
speed 12
0.0% ○
P10.27
The running
time of stage
12
0.0s ○
P10.28
Multi-stage
speed 13
0.0% ○
P10.29
The running
time of stage
13
0.0s ○
P10.30
Multi-stage
speed 14
0.0% ○
P10.31
The running
time of stage
14
0.0s ○
P10.32
Multi-stage
speed 15
0.0% ○
P10.33
The running
time of stage
15
0.0s ○
P10.34
Simple PLC
0~7 stage
ACC/DEC
time
selection
Below is the detailed instruction:
Function
code
Binary bit
Stag
e
ACC/DE
C 0
ACC/DE
C 1
ACC/DE
C 2
ACC/DE
C 3
P10.34
BIT1 BIT0 0 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 1 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 2 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 3 00 01 10 11
BIT9 BIT8 4 00 01 10 11
BIT11 BIT10 5 00 01 10 11
0x0000 ○
P10.35
Simple PLC
8~15 stage
ACC/DEC
time
0x0000 ○

118
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
selection BIT13 BIT12 6 00 01 10 11
BIT15 BIT14 7 00 01 10 11
P10.35
BIT1 BIT0 8 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 9 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 10 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 11 00 01 10 11
BIT9 BIT8 12 00 01 10 11
BIT11 BIT10 13 00 01 10 11
BIT13 BIT12 14 00 01 10 11
BIT15 BIT14 15 00 01 10 11
After the users select the corresponding ACC/DEC
time, the combining 16 binary bit will change into
decimal bit, and then set the corresponding function
codes.
Setting range: -0x0000~0xFFFF
P10.36
PLC restart
manner
selection
0:Restart from the first stage; stop during running
(cause by the stop command, fault or power loss),
run from the first stage after restart.
1: Continue to run from the stop frequency; stop
during running(cause by stop command and fault),
the inverter will record the running time
automatically, enter into the stage after restart and
keep the remaining running at the setting frequency.
0 ◎
P10.37
Multi-stage
time unit
selection
0: Seconds；the running time of all stages is counted
by second
1: Minutes；the running time of all stages is counted
by minute
0 ◎
P11 Group Protective parameters
P11.00
Phase loss
protection
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0: Input phase loss protection disable
11 ○

119
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1: Input phase loss protection enable
LED tens:
0: Input phase loss protection disable
1: Input phase loss protection enable
P11.01
Sudden
power loss
frequency
decreasing
function
selection
0: Enable
1: Disable
0 ○
P11.02
frequency
decreasing
ratio of
sudden
power loss
Setting range: 0.00Hz/s~P00.03 (the Max.
frequency)
After the power loss of the grid, the bus voltage
drops to the sudden frequency-decreasing point, the
inverter begin to decrease the running frequency at
P11.02, to make the inverter generate power again.
The returning power can maintain the bus voltage to
ensure a rated running of the inverter until the
recovery of power.
Voltage degree 220V 380V 660V
frequency-decre
asing point of
sudden power
loss
260V 460V 800V
Note:
1. Adjust the parameter properly to avoid the
stopping caused by inverter protection during the
switching of the grid.
2. Prohibition of input phase protection can enable
this function.
10.00Hz/
s
○
P11.03 Overvoltage 0:Disable 1 ○

120
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
speed loss
protection
1:Enable
P11.04
Overvoltage
speed loss
voltage
protection
120~150%(standard bus voltage)(400V) 140%
○
120~150%(standard bus voltage)(220V) 120%
P11.05
Current limit
action
selection
The actual increasing ratio is less than the ratio of
output frequency because of the big load during
ACC running. It is necessary to take measures to
avoid overcurrent fault and the inverter trips.
During the running of the inverter, this function will
detect the output current and compare it with the limit
level defined in P11.06. If it exceeds the level, the
inverter will run at stable frequency in ACC running,
or the inverter will derate to run during the constant
running. If it exceeds the level continuously, the
output frequency will keep on decreasing to the
lower limit. If the output current is detected to be
lower than the limit level, the inverter will accelerate
to run.
1 ◎
P11.06
Automatic
current limit
level
G
motor:16
0.0%
◎
P
motor:12
0.0%
P11.07
The
decreasing
ratio during
current limit
10.00Hz/
s
◎

121
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range of P11.05:
0:current limit invalid
1:current limit valid
2:current limit is invalid during constant speed
Setting range of P11.06:50.0~200.0%
Setting range of P11.07:0.00~50.00Hz/s
P11.08
Overload
pre-alarm of
the motor or
the inverter
The output current of the inverter or the motor is
above P11.09 and the lasting time is beyond P11.10,
overload pre-alarm will be output.
Setting range of P11.08:
Enable and define the overload pre-alarm of the
inverter or the motor.
Setting range: 0x000~0x131
LED ones:
0:Overload pre-alarm of the motor, comply with the
rated current of the motor
0x000 ○
P11.09
Overload
pre-alarm
test level
G
motor:15
0%
○
P
motor:12
0%
P11.10
Overload
pre-alarm
detection
time
1.0s ○

122
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1:Overload pre-alarm of the inverter, comply with the
rated current of the inverter
LED tens:
0:The inverter continues to work after underload
pre-alarm
1:The inverter continues to work after underload
pre-alarm and the inverter stops to run after overload
fault
2: The inverter continues to work after overload
pre-alarm and the inverter stops to run after
underload fault
3. The inverter stops when overloading or
underloading.
LED hundreds :
0:Detection all the time
1:Detection in constant running
Setting range of P11.09: P11.11~200%
P11.11
Detection
level of the
underload
pre-alarm
If the inverter current or the output current is lower
than P11.11, and its lasting time is beyond P11.12,
the inverter will output underload pre-alarm.
Setting range of P11.11: 0~P11.09
50% ○
P11.12
Detection
time of the
underload
pre-alarm
1.0s ○
P11.13
Output
terminal
action
selection
during fault
Select the action of fault output terminals on
undervoltage and fault reset.
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0:Action under fault undervoltage
0x00 ○

123
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
1:No action under fault undervoltage
LED tens:
0:Action during the automatic reset
1:No action during the automatic reset
P11.14
Speed
deviation
detection
0.0~50.0%
Set the speed deviation detection time.
10.0% ●
P11.15
Speed
deviation
detection
time
This parameter is used to set the speed deviation
detection time.
0.5s ○
P11.16 Reserved
P12 Group Motor 2
P12.00 Motor type 2
1:Synchronous motor
Note: switch the current motor by the switching
channel of P08.31.
0 ◎
P12.01
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Set the parameter of the
controlled
asynchronous motor.
In order to ensure the
controlling
performance, set the
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.02
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rated
0.01Hz~P00.03(the
Max. frequency)
50.00Hz ◎

124
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
frequency P12.01~P12.05
according to the name
plate of the
asynchronous motor.
GD300 series inverters
provide the function of
parameter autotuning.
Correct parameter
autotuning comes from
the correct setting of the
motor name plate.
controlling
performance, please
configure the motor
according to the
standard principles, if
the gap between the
motor and the standard
one is huge, the
features of the inverter
will decrease.
Note:reset the rated
power of the
motor(P12.01),initialize
the motor parameter of
P12.02~P12.05
P12.03
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rated rotation
speed
1~36000rpm
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.04
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rated
voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.05
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rated
current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.06
Asynchronou
s motor 2
rotor
resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
After finish the motor
parameter autotuning,
the value of
P12.06~P12.10 will be
Depend
on
module
○

125
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P12.07
Asynchronou
s motor 2
stator
resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
renewed automatically.
These parameters are
basic parameters of
vector control which
directly impact the
features.
Note: Users cannot
modify the parameters
freely.
Depend
on
module
○
P12.08
Asynchronou
s motor 2
leakage
0.1~655.35mH
Depend
on
module
○
P12.09
Asynchronou
s motor 2
mutual
induction
0.1~655.35mH
Depend
on
module
○
P12.10
Asynchronou
s motor 2
noload
current
0.1~6553.5A
Depend
on
module
○
P12.11 Reserved 88% ◎
P12.15
Synchronous
motor 2 rated
power
0.1~3000.0kW
Set the parameter of the
controlled synchronous
motor.
controlling
performance, set the
P12.151~P12.19
according to the name
plate of the
synchronous motor.
GD300 series inverters
provide the function of
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.16
Synchronous
motor 2 rated
frequency
0.01Hz~P00.03(the
Max. frequency)
50.00Hz ◎
S
Synchronous
motor 2
pority pairs
1~50 2 ◎
P12.18
Synchronous
motor 2 rated
voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
◎

126
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P12.19
Synchronous
motor 2 rated
current
0.8~6000.0A
parameter autotuning.
Correct parameter
autotuning comes from
the correct setting of the
motor name plate.
controlling
performance, please
configure the motor
according to the
standard principles, if
the gap between the
motor and the standard
one is huge, the
features of the inverter
will decrease.
Note: reset the rated
power of the
motor(P12.15),initialize
the motor parameter of
P12.16~ P12.19.
Depend
on
module
◎
P12.20
Synchronous
motor 2 rotor
resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
○
P12.21
Synchronous
motor 2
d-axis
inductor
0.1~6553.5mH
After finish the motor
parameter autotuning,
the value of
P12.20~P12.22 will be
renewed automatically.
These parameters are
basic parameters of
vector control which
directly impact the
features.
Depend
on
module
○
P12.22
Synchronous
motor 2
quadrature
axis inductor
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
○
P12.23
Synchronous
motor 2
When P00.15=2, the set
value of P12.23 cannot be
300 ○

127
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
counter-elect
romotive
force
constant
updated by autotuning,
please count according to
the following method.
The counter-electromotive
force constant can be
counted according to the
parameters on the name
plate of the motor. There are
three ways to count:
1. If the name plate
designate the
counter-electromotive force
constant Ke, then:
E=（Ke*nN*2π）/ 60
2. If the name plate
designate the
counter-electromotive force
constant E’(V/1000r/min),
then:
E=E’*nN/1000
3. Iif the name plate does
not designate the above
parameters, then:
E=P/√3*I
In the above formulas: nN is
the rated rotation speed, P
is the rated power and I is
the rated current.
When P00.15=1, the
set value of P12.23 can
be updated through
autotuning
automatically, and there
is no need to change
the value of P12.23;
when P00.15=2, the set
value of P12.23 can not
be updated through
autotuning, please
account and update the
value of P12.23.
Note:Users cannot
modify the parameters
freely.
P12.24
Synchronous
motor 2
0~FFFFH (reserved) 0x0000 ●

128
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
original
magnetic
pority
position
P12.25
Synchronous
motor 2
identification
current
0%~50%(the rated current of the motor)(reserved) 10% ●
P12.26
Motor 2
overload
protection
selection
0:No protection
1:Common motor(with low speed compensation)
2:Invertering motor(without low speed
compensation)
2 ◎
P12.27
Motor 2
overload
protection
coefficient
When P12.27=overload protection current of the
motor/rated current of the motor
So, the bigger the overload coefficient is, the shorter
the reporting time of the overload fault is. When the
overload coefficient <110%, there is no overload
protection. When the overload coefficient =116%,
the fault will be reported after 1 hour, when the
overload coefficient =200%, the fault will be reported
after 1 minute. 100.0% ○

129
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Setting range: 20.0%~120.0%
P12.28 Reserved ●
P12.29
Motor 2
parameters
display
selection
0: Display according to the motor type: only the
parameters relative to the current motor type are
displayed for the convenient for the customers in this
mode.
1: All parameters are displayed: all parameters are
displayed in this mode.
0 ●
P13 Group Synchronous motor control
P13.00 Reserved 30.0% ◎
P13.01
Initial pole
angle
identified
mode
0:Inject current
1:Reserved
2:Reserved
0 ◎
P13.02
Inject current
1
Injecting current is to fix the right direction of the
magnetic pole position. Injecting current 1 is effective
under the frequency point of current shifting.
Generally the user need not change it.
Setting range；0.0%~100.0%
10.0% ○
P13.03
Inject current
2
Injecting current is to fix the right direction of the
magnetic pole position. Injecting current 2 is effective
under the frequency point of current shifting. Please
increase the value is the starting torque should be
modified. Setting range: 0.0%~100.0%
8.0% ○
P13.04
Inject current
shift
frequency
Valid frequency shifting point between injecting
current 1 and current 2.
Setting range: 0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency)
10.00 Hz ○
P13.05 Reserved 0~65535 500Hz ◎
P13.06 Reserved 0~65535 10.0% ◎
P13.07 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○

130
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P13.08 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○
P13.09 Reserved 0~655.35 2.00 ○
P13.10 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○
P13.11
Maladjustme
nt detection
time
Adjust the response of anti-maladjustment. If the
inertia of the load is bigger, this value may be bigger
too, but the response will be slow.
0.5s ○
P13.12
Weakening
coefficient
When the motor runs above the rated rotation speed,
the parameter is valid, if vibration occurs to the
motor, please adjust the parameter.
1000 ○
P13.13
Braking
current of
shirt-circuit
When P01.00=0 during the starting of the inverter,
set P13.14 to a non-zero value to enter the short
circuit braking.
When the running frequency is lower than P01.09
during the stopping of the inverter, set 13.15 to a
non-zero value to enter into stopping short circuited
braking and then carry out the DC braking at the time
set by P01.12.
Setting range of P13.13: 0.0~150.0%(the inverter)
0.0% ○
P13.14
The retention
time when
starting short
circuit
braking
0.0s ○
P13.15
The retention
time of
short circuit
braking when
stopping
0.0s ○
P14 Group Serial communication
P14.00
The
communicati
The setting range:1~247
When the master is writing the frame, the
1 ○

131
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
on address
of the drive
communication address of the slave is set to 0; the
broadcast address is the communication address. All
slaves on the MODBUS fieldbus can receive the
frame, but the salve doesn’t answer.
The communication address of the drive is unique in
the communication net. This is the fundamental for
the point to point communication between the upper
monitor and the drive.
Note:The address of the slave cannot set to 0.
P14.01
The
communicati
on baud ratio
of the drive
Set the digital transmission speed between the
upper monitor and the inverter.
0:1200BPS
1:2400BPS
2:4800BPS
3:9600BPS
4:19200BPS
5:38400BPS
Note:The baud rate between the upper monitor and
the inverter must be the same. Otherwise, the
communication is not applied. The bigger the baud
rate, the quicker the communication speed.
4 ○
P14.02
Digital bit
checkout
setting
The data format between the upper monitor and the
inverter must be the same. Otherwise, the
communication is not applied.
0: No check (N,8,1)for RTU
1:Odd check (E,8,1)for RTU
2:Even check (O,8,1)for RTU
3:No check (N,8,2)for RTU
4: Odd check (E,8,2)for RTU
5:Even check(O,8,2)for RTU
1 ○
P14.03 Communicati0~200ms 5 ○

132
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
on answer
delay
It means the interval time between the interval time
when the drive receive the data and sent it to the
upper monitor. If the answer delay is shorter than the
system processing time, then the answer delay time
is the system processing time, if the answer delay is
longer than the system processing time, then after
the system deal with the data, waits until achieving
the answer delay time to send the data to the upper
monitor.
P14.04
Communicati
on overtime
fault time
0.0(invalid),0.1~60.0s
When the function code is set as 0.0, the
communication overtime parameter is invalid.
When the function code is set as non-zero, if the
interval time between two communications exceeds
the communication overtime, the system will report
“485 communication faults” (CE).
Generally, set it as invalid; set the parameter in the
continuous communication to monitor the
communication state.
0.0s ○
P14.05
Transmissio
n fault
processing
0:Alarm and stop freely
1:No alarm and continue to run
2:No alarm and stop according to the stop
means(only under the communication control)
3:No alarm and stop according to the stop
means(under all control modes)
0 ○
P14.06
Communicati
on
processing
action
selection
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0:Operation with response: the drive will respond to
all reading and writing commands of the upper
monitor.
1:Operation without response ； The drive only
0x00 ○

133
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
responds to the reading command other than the
writing command of the drive. The communication
efficiency can be increased by this method.
LED tens:(reserved)
P14.07 Reserved ●
P14.08 Reserved ●
P15 Group Profibus function
P15.00 Module type
0:Profibus
Select communication protocol
0 ◎
P15.01
Module
address
0~127
This function code is used to designate the address
of the inverter.
Note:0 is the broadcast address,when set it as
broadcast address, only receive the radio command
of the upper monitor other than answering the upper
monitor.
2 ◎
P15.02
PZD2
Receiving
0:Invalid
1:Set frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz))
2: Given PID, range (0~1000, 1000 corresponds to
100.0%)
3: PID feedback, range (0~1000, 1000 corresponds
to 100.0%)
4:Torque set value(-3000~3000,1000 corresponds to
100.0% the rated current of the motor)
5: Upper-limit frequency of forward (0~Fmax
unit:0.01Hz))
6: Upper-limit frequency of reverse
(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz))
7:Electromotion torque upper limit (0~3000,1000
corresponds to 100.0%of the rated current of the
motor)
0 ○
P15.03
PZD3
Receiving
0 ○
P15.04
PZD4
Receiving
0 ○
P15.05
PZD5
Receiving
0 ○
P15.06
PZD6
Receiving
0 ○
P15.07
PZD7
Receiving
0 ○
P15.08
PZD8
Receiving
0 ○
P15.09 PZD9 0 ○

134
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Receiving 8:Braking torque upper limit (0~2000,1000
corresponds to 100.0% of the rated current of the
motor)
9:Virtual input terminals command
Range:0x000~0x1FF
10:Virtual output terminals command
Range:0x00~0x0F
11:Voltage setting value(specialized for V/F
separation )(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%
the rated voltage of the motor)
12: Output of AO1 (-1000~1000,1000 corresponds
to 100.0%)
13: Output of AO2 (-1000~1000,1000 corresponds
to 100.0%)
P15.10
PZD10
Receiving
0 ○
P15.11
PZD11
Receiving
0 ○
P15.12
PZD12
Receiving
0 ○
P15.13
PZD2
sending
0: Invalid
1: Running frequency(*100,Hz)
2: Set frequency(*100,Hz)
3: Bus voltage(*10,V)
4: Output voltage(*1,V)
5:Output current (*10,A)
6:Output torque actual value(*10,%)
7:Output power actual value(*10,%)
8:Running rotating speed(*1,RPM)
9:Running linear speed (*1,m/s)
10:Ramp given frequency
11:Fault code
12:AI1 value (*100,V)
13:AI2 value (*100,V)
14:AI3 value (*100,V)
15:PULSE frequency value (*100,kHz)
16:Terminals input state
0 ○
P15.14
PZD3
sending
0 ○
P15.15
PZD4
sending
0 ○
P15.16
PZD5
sending
0 ○
P15.17
PZD6
sending
0 ○
P15.18
PZD7
sending
0 ○
P15.19
PZD8
sending
0 ○
P15.20
PZD9
sending
0 ○
P15.21 PZD10 0 ○

135
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
sending 17:Terminals output state
18:PID given(*100,%)
19:PID feedback(*100,%)
20:Motor rated torque
P15.22
PZD11
sending
0 ○
P15.23
PZD12
sending
0 ○
P15.24
Temporarily
variable 1 for
PZD sending
0~65535 0 ○
P15.25
DP
communicati
on overtime
downtime
0.0(ineffective),0.1~60.0s
When this function code is set as 0.0, this function is
ineffective.
When the function code is set as nonzero value, if
the internal time between two adjent communication
exceeds the communication overtime, the system
will report “PROFIBUS communication fault”(P-DP) .
0.0s ○
P15.26 Reserved ●
P15.27 Reserved ●
P15.28 Reserved ●
P15.29 Reserved ●
P16 Group Ethernet function
P16.00
Speed
setting of the
Ethernet
communicati
on
0:Self-adapting
1:100M full duplex
2:100M semiduplex
3:10M full duplex
4:10M semiduplex
The function code is used to set the Ethernet
communication speed.
3 ◎
P16.01 IP address 1 0~255
Set the IP address of Ethernet communication
The format of IP address:PA.09.PA.10.PA.11.PA.12.
192 ◎
P16.02 IP address 2 168 ◎
P16.03 IP address 3 0 ◎

136
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P16.04 IP address 4 For example:IP address is 192.168.0.1. 1 ◎
P16.05 Subnet mask
1
0~255
Set the subnet mask of Ethernet communication.
The format of IP subnet
mask:PA.13.PA.14.PA.15.PA.16.
For example:The mask is 255.255.255.0.
255
◎
P16.06 Subnet mask
2
255
◎
P16.07 Subnet mask
3
255
◎
P16.08 Subnet mask
4
0
◎
P16.09 Gateway 1
0~255
Set the gateway of Ethernet communication
192 ◎
P16.10 Gateway 2 168 ◎
P16.11 Gateway 3 1 ◎
P16.12 Gateway 4 1 ◎
P16.13 Reserved ●
P16.14 Reserved ●
P17 Group Monitoring function
P17.00
Set
frequency
Display current set frequency of the inverter
Range: 0.00Hz~P00.03
0.00Hz ●
P17.01
Output
frequency
Display current output frequency of the inverter
0.00Hz ●
P17.02
Ramp given
frequency
Display current ramp given frequency of the inverter
0.00Hz ●
P17.03
Output
voltage
Display current output voltage of the inverter
Range: 0~1200V
0V ●
P17.04
Output
current
Display current output current of the inverter
Range: 0.0~5000.0A
0.0A ●
P17.05
The rotation
speed of the
motor
Display the rotation speed of the motor.
Range: 0~65535RPM
0 RPM ●
P17.06 Torque Display current torque current of the inverter 0.0A ●

137
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
current Range: 0~65535RPM
P17.07
Magnetized
current
Display current magnetized current of the inverter
Range: 0.0~5000.0A
0.0A ●
P17.08 Motor power
Display current power of the motor.
Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(the rated current of
the motor)
0.0% ●
P17.09
Output
torque
Display the current output torque of the inverter.
Range: -250.0~250.0%
0.0% ●
P17.10
The motor
frequency
evaluation
Evaluate the motor rotor frequency on open loop
vector
Range: 0.00~ P00.03
0.00Hz ●
P17.11
DC bus
voltage
Display current DC bus voltage of the inverter
Range: 0.0~2000.0V
0V ●
P17.12
Switch input
terminals
state
Display current Switch input terminals state of the
inverter
Range: 0000~00FF
0 ●
P17.13
Switch
output
terminals
state
Display current Switch output terminals state of the
inverter
Range: 0000~000F
0 ●
P17.14
Digital
adjustment
Display the adjustment through the keypad of the
inverter.
Range : 0.00Hz~P00.03
0.00V ●
P17.15 Torque given
Display the torque given, the percentage to the
current rated torque of the motor.
Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(the rated current of
the motor)
0.0% ●
P17.16 Linear speed
Display the current linear speed of the inverter.
Range: 0~65535
0 ●
P17.17 Length
Display the current length of the inverter.
Range: 0~65535
0 ●

138
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
P17.18
Counting
value
Display the current counting number of the inverter.
Range: 0~65535
0 ●
P17.19
AI1 input
voltage
Display analog AI1 input signal
Range: 0.00~10.00V
0.00V ●
P17.20
AI2 input
voltage
Range: 0.00~10.00V
0.00V ●
P17.21
AI3 input
voltage
Range: -10.00~10.00V
0.00V ●
P17.22
HDI input
frequency
Display HDI input frequency
Range: 0.00~50.00kHz
0.00 kHz ●
P17.23
PID given
value
Display PID given value
Range: -100.0~100.0%
0.0% ●
P17.24
PID
response
value
Display PID response value
Range: -100.0~100.0%
0.0% ●
P17.25
Power factor
of the motor
Display the current power factor of the motor.
Range: -1.00~1.00
0.0 ●
P17.26
Current
running time
Display the current running time of the inverter.
Range:0~65535min
0m ●
P17.27
Simple PLC
and the
current stage
of the
multi-stage
speed
Display simple PLC and the current stage of the
multi-stage speed
Range: 0~15
0 ●
P17.28
ASR
controller
output
The percentage of the rated torque of the relative
motor, display ASR controller output
Range: -300.0%~300.0% (the rated current of the
motor)
0.0% ●
P17.29
Synchronous
motor
Display synchronous motor Magnetic pole angle
Range: 0.0~360.0
0.0 ●

139
Functio
n code
Default
value
Modify
Magnetic
pole angle
P17.30
synchronous
motor phase
compensatio
n
Display synchronous motor phase compensation
Range: -180.0~180.0
0.0 ●
P17.31
synchronous
motor
high-frequen
cy
Superimpose
d current
Display synchronous motor high-frequency
Superimposed current
Range: 0.0%~200.0%(the rated current of the motor)
0.0 ●
P17.32
Magnetic flux
linkage
Display the magnetic flux linkage of the motor.
Range: 0.0%~200.0%
0 ●
P17.33
Exciting
current given
Display the exciting current given in the vector
control mode.
Range: -3000.0~3000.0A
0 ●
P17.34
Torque
current given
Display the torque current given in the vector control
mode.
Range: -3000.0~3000.0A
0 ●
P17.35
AC input
current
Display the input current in AC side.
Range: 0.0~5000.0A
0 ●
P17.36
Output
torque
Display the output torque. Positive value is in the
electromotion state, and negative is in the power
generating state.
Range : -3000.0Nm~3000.0Nm
0 ●
P17.37 Reserved 0 ●

Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction
140
Basic Operation Instruction 7
This chapter describes the internal function mode of the inverter in details.
²Check all terminals are connected properly and tightly.
²Check that the power of the motor corresponds to that of the inverter.
7.2 First powering on
Check before powering on
Please check according to the installation list in chapter two.
Original powering operation
Check to ensure there is no mistake in wiring and power supply, switch on the air switch of the AC
power supply on the input side of the inverter to power on the inverter. 8.8.8.8.8. will be displayed
on the keypad, and the contactor closes normally. When the character on the nixie tubs changes to
the set frequency, the inverter has finished the initialization and it is in the stand-by state.
Below diagram shows the first operation: (take motor 1 as the example)

141

142
Note: If fault occurs, please do as the “Fault Tracking”. Estimate the fault reason and settle the
issue.
Besides P00.01 and P00.02, terminal command setting can also used to set the running command
channel.
Current runnig
command
channel
P00.01
Multi-function
terminal 36
Shifting the
command to keypad
Multi-function
terminal 37
Shifting the
command to
communication
Multi-function
terminal 38
Shifting the
command to
communication
Keypad runnig
command
channel
/
Terminal runnig
command channel
Communication
runnig command
channel
Terminal runnig
command
channel
Keypad runnig
command channel
/
Communication
runnig command
channel
Communication
runnig command
channel
Keypad runnig
command channel
Terminal runnig
command channel
/
Note: “/” means the multi-function terminal is invalid on the current given channel.
Relative parameters table:
Function
code
Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default
value
P00.00 Speed control mode
0: Sensorless vector control mode 0
(applying to AM,SM)
(applying to AM)
2:V/F control (applying to AM and SM)
0
P00.01 Run command channel
channel(LED off)
(LED flickering)
2:Communication running command
channel (LED on)；
0

143
Function
code
value
P00.02
Communication running
commands channel
selection
0:MODBUS communication channel
1:PROFIBUScommunication channel
2:Ethernet communication channel
3:CAN communication channel
0
P00.18
Function parameter
restore
0:No operation
1:Restore the default value
2: Clear fault records
0
P00.15
Motor parameter
autotuning
0:No operation
2:Static autotuning
0
P02.00 Motor type 1
1:Synchronous motor
0
P02.01
Asynchronous motor 1
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P02.02 Asynchronous motor 1
rated power
0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz
P02.03
rated speed
1~36000rpm
Depend
on
module
P02.04
rated voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
P02.05
rated current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
P02.15
Synchronous motor 1
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P02.16 Synchronous motor 1
rated frequency
0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency)
50.00Hz
P02.17 Synchronous motor 1 1~50 2

144
Function
code
value
number of poles pairs
rated voltage
0~1200V Depend
on
module
rated current
0.8~6000.0A Depend
on
module
P05.01~P0
5.09
Multi-function digital input
terminals
(S1~S8,HDI) function
selection
38:Shift the command to the
communication
P07.01 Function parameter copy
The function code determines the
manner of parameters copy.
0:No operation
1:Upload the local function parameter to
the keypad
2:Download the keypad function
parameter to local address(including the
motor parameters)
parameter to local address (excluding the
motor parameter of P02, P12 group)
parameters to local address (only for the
motor parameter of P02,P12 group)
0
P07.02
QUICK/JOG function
selection
0:No function
1:Jogging running. Press QUICK/JOGto
realizes the jogging running.
2:Shift the display state by the shifting
key. Press QUICK/JOGto shift the
displayed function code from right to left.
3:Shift between forwad rotations and
1

145
Function
code
value
reverse rotations. Press QUICK/JOG to
shift the direction of the frequency
commands. This function is only valid in
the keypad commands channels.
4:Clear UP/DOWN settings. Press
QUICK/JOG to clear the set value of
UP/DOWN.
5:Coast to stop. Press QUICK/JOG to
coast to stop.
6:Shift the given manner of running
commands. Press QUICK/JOG to shift
the given manner of running commands.
7:Quick commission mode(committee
according to the non-factory parameter)
7.3 Vector control
Because asynchronous motors have the characteristics of high stage, nonlinear, strong coupling
and various variables, the actual control of the asynchronous motor is very difficult. Vector control
is mainly used to settle this problem with the theme of that divide the stator current vector into
exciting current (the current heft generating internal magnetic field of the motor) and torque current
(the current heft generating torque) by controlling and measuring the stator current vector
according to the principles of beamed magnetic field to control the range and phase of these two
hefts. This method can realize the decoupling of exciting current and torque current to adjust the
high performance of asynchronous motors.
Goodrive300 series inverters are embedded sensorless vector control calculation for driving both
asynchronous motors and synchronous motors. Because the core calculation of vector control is
based on exact motor parameter models, the accuracy of motor parameter will impact on the
performance of vector control. It is recommended to input the motor parameters and carry out
autotuning before vector running.
Because the vector control calculation is vary complicated, high technical theory is needed for the
user during internal autotuning. It is recommended to use the specific function parameters in vector
control with cautions.

146
Function
code
Name
Detailed instruction of parameters Default
value
(applying to AM,SM)
(applying to AM)
0
P00.15
Motor parameter
autotuning
2:Static autotuning
0:No operation
0
P02.00 Motor type 1
1:Synchronous motor
0
P03.00
Speed loop proportional
gain1
0~200.0 20.0
P03.01 Speed loop integral time1 0.001~10.000s 0.200s
P03.02 Low switching frequency 0.00Hz~P03.05 5.00Hz
P03.03
Speed loop proportional
gain 2
0~200.0 20.0
P03.04 Speed loop integral time 2 0.001~10.000s 0.200s
P03.05 High switching frequency P03.02~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 10.00Hz
P03.06 Speed output filter 0~8( corresponds to 0~28
/10ms) 0

147
Function
code
Name
value
P03.07
Vector control
electromotion slip
compensation coefficient
50%~200% 100%
P03.08
Vector control brake slip
compensation coefficient
50%~200% 100%
P03.09
Current loop percentage
coeffient P
0~65535 1000
P03.10
Current loop integral
coefficient 1
0~65535 1000
P03.11 Torque setting method
6: Multi-stage torque setting
torque
torque
9:Ethernet communication setting torque
Note: 100% of Setting methods 2~10,
corresponds to three times of the rated
current of the motor.
0
P03.12 Keypad setting torque
-300.0%~300.0%(rated current of the
motor)
50.0%
P03.13 Torque given filter time 0.000~10.000s 0.100s
P03.14
Torque control forward
rotation upper-limit
frequency setting saurce
selection
0:Keypad setting upper-limit
frequency(P03.16)
1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit
frequency
0

148
Function
code
Name
value
frequency
frequency
4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit
frequency
5:Multi-stages setting upper-limit
frequency
upper-limit frequency
8:Ethernet communication setting
9:CAN communication setting upper-limit
frequency
Note:setting method 1~9,100%
corresponds to the maximum frequency
P03.15
Torque control reverse
frequency keypad defined
value
0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency
(P03.17 setting)
1~9:the same as P03.14
0
P03.16
Torque control forward
value Setting range:0.00Hz~P00.03(the
Maximum frequency)
50.00Hz
P03.17
Torque control reverse
value
50.00Hz
P03.18
Electromotion torque
upper-limit keypad setting
0:Keypad sets the upper-limit of
torque(P03.18 sets the value of P03.16;
0

149
Function
code
Name
value
P03.19 sets the value of P03.17)
1:Analog AI1 setting torque upper-limit
upper-limit
torque upper-limit
torque upper-limit
7: Ethernet communication setting torque
upper-limit
upper-limit
Note:setting means 1~9,100%
corresponds to three times of motor
current.
P03.19
Brake torque upper-limit
setting saurce selection
0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency
(P03.21 setting)
1~8:the same as P03.18
0
P03.20
Brake torque upper-limit
keypad setting
0.0~300.0%(rated current of the motor)
180.0%
P03.21
Weakening coefficience in
constant power zone
180.0%
P03.22
The loweat weakening
coefficient in Constant
power zone
0.1~2.0 1.0
P03.23
The loweat weakening
point in Constant power
zone
10%~100% 50%
P03.24 Max. voltage limit 0.0~120.0% 100.0%
P03.25 Pre-exciting time 0.000~10.000s 0.300s

150
Function
code
Name
value
P17.32 Magnetic flux linkage 0.0~200.0% 0
7.4 V/F control
Goodrive300 series inverters provide internal V/F control which can be used in the cases where it
does not need high control accuracy. It is also recommended to use V/F control when one inverter
drives multiple motors.
Goodrive300 series inverters provide multiple V/F curve modes. The user can select the
corresponding V/F curve to the site needs. Or they can set the corresponding V/F curve to their
own needs.
Recommendations:
For the load of constant torque, such as the conveyor belt which runs linearly. It is properly to
select linear V/F curve because it needs constant torque.
For the load of decreasing torque, such as fans and water pumps, it is properly to select
corresponding 1.3th, 1.7th or 2th power of V/F curve because the actual torque is 2-squared or
3-squared of the rotating speed.
Goodrive300 series inverters provide multi-dots V/F curve, the user can change the output V/F
curve by setting the voltage and frequency of three middle dots. The whole curve is consisted of 5
dots. The starting dot is (0Hz, 0V), and the ending dot is (the basic frequency of the motor, the
rated voltage of the motor). During the setting processing: 0≤f1≤f2≤f3≤the basic frequency of the
motor; 0≤V1≤V2≤V3≤the rated voltage of the motor.

151
Goodrive300 series inverters provide special function code for V/F control mode which can
improve the performance of V/F control by means of setting.
1. Torque boost
Torque boost function can compensate the performance of low speed torque during V/F control.
The inverter will adjust the torque boost according to the actual load.
Note:
The torque boost takes effect only when the frequency is under the cap frequency of the boost.
If the torque boost is too big, low frequency vibration or overcurrent fault may occur. Please lower
the torque boost.
2. Energy-saving running
In the actual operation, the inverter can search by itself to achieve a better effect point. The
inverter can work with high effect to save energy.
Note:
This function is usually used in the cases where the load is light or empty.
If the load transients frequently, this function is not appropriate to be slected.
3. V/F slips compensation gain
V/F control belongs to the open loop mode. If the load of the motor transients suddenly, the
fluctuation of the rotation speed may occur. In the cases where the high accuracy speed is
needed, slip compensation gain (internal output adjustment) can be set to compensate the
speed change caused by load fluctuation.

152
Setting range of slip compensation gain: 0~200%, of which 100% corresponds to the rated slip
frequency.
Note: Rated slip frequency= (rated synchronous rotation speed of the motor-rated rotation
speed of the motor) *number of pole pairs/60.
4. Vibration control
Motor vibration occurs frequently when applying V/F control mode in the cases where high
power is needed. In order to settle this problem, Goodrive300 series inverters add two function
codes which are set to control the vibration factors. The user can set the corresponding function
code according to the vibration frequency.
Note: Bigger the set value, more effective is the control. If the set value is too big, overcurrent
may occur to the motor.
5. User-defined V/F curve (V/F seperation) function
When the user selects the user-defined V/F curve function in Goodrive300 series inverters, they
can set the given channel of voltage and frequency and the corresponding ACC/DEC time, or the
two can combinate to form a real-time curve.
Note: the application of V/F curve separation can be used in many cases with various kinds of
power supply of the inverter. But the users should set and adjust the parameters with caution.
Incorrect parameters may cause damage to the inverter.
Function
code
Name
value
(applying to AM,SM)
0

153
Function
code
Name
value
(applying to AM)
P00.03 Max. output frequency P00.04~400.00Hz 50.00Hz
P00.04
Upper limit of the running
frequency
P00.05~P00.03 50.00Hz
P00.05
Lower limit of the running
frequency
0.00Hz~P00.04 0.00Hz
P00.11 ACC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
module
P00.12 DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
module
P02.00 Motor type 1
1:Synchronous motor
0
P02.02
rated power
0.01Hz~P00.03(Max frequency 50.00
P02.04
rated voltage
0~1200V 380
P04.00 Motor 1V/F curve setting
2:1.3th power low torque V/F curve
5:Customized V/F(V/F separation)
0
P04.01 Motor 1 torque boost 0.0%:(automatic)0.1%~10.0% 0.0%
P04.02 Motor 1 torque boost close
0.0%~50.0%(the rated frequency of
motor 1)
20.0%
P04.03
Motor 1V/F
Frequency point 1
0.00Hz~P04.05 0.00Hz
P04.04 Motor 1V/F voltage point 1 0.0%~110.0% 00.0%

154
Function
code
Name
value
P04.05
Motor 1V/F
Frequency point 2
P04.03~ P04.07 00.00Hz
P04.07
Motor 1V/F
Frequency point 3
P04.05~ P02.02 or P04.05~ P02.16 00.00Hz
P04.09
Motor 1V/F slip
compensation gain
0.0~200.0% 0.0%
P04.10
Motor 1 low frequency
vibration control factor
0~100 10
P04.11
Motor 1 high frequency
0~100 10
P04.12
Motor 1 vibration control
threshold
0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 30.00 Hz
P04.13 Motor 2V/Fcurve setting
0:Linear V/F curve
2:1.3th power of torque V/F curve
3:1.7 th power of torque V/F curve
4:2.0 th power of torque V/F curve
5:self-defined V/F(V/Fseperation )
0
P04.14 Motor 2 torque boost 0.0%: (automatic) 0.1%~10.0% 0.0%
P04.15 Motor 2 torque boost close 0.0%~50.0%(rated frequency of motor 1) 20.0%
P04.16
Motor 2V/F frequency
point 1
0.00Hz~P04.05 0.00Hz
P04.18
point 2
P04.03~ P04.07 00.00Hz
P04.20
point 3
P04.05~ P02.02 or P04.05~ P02.16 00.00Hz

155
Function
code
Name
value
P04.22
Motor 2V/F slip
compensation gain
0.0~200.0% 0.0%
P04.23
Motor 2 low frequency
0~100 10
P04.24
Motor 2 high frequency
0~100 10
P04.25
Motor 2 vibration control
threshold
P04.26
Energy-saving running
selection
0: no action
1: automatic energy-saving running
0
P04.27
Voltage Setting Channal
selection
0:Keypad setting voltage: the output
voltage is determined by P04.28;
1:AI1setting voltage;
2:AI2 setting voltage;
4:HDI1 setting voltage；
5:Multi-stes setting voltage；
6:PID setting voltage；
voltage；
voltage；
9:Ethernet communication setting
voltage；(Reversed)
10:CAN communication setting voltage；
(Reversed)
0
P04.28 Keypad setting voltage
0.0%~100.0%(the rated voltage of
motor)
100.0%
P04.29 Voltage increasing time 0.0~3600.0s 5.0s
P04.30 Voltage decreasing time 0.0~3600.0s 5.0s
P04.31 Output maximum voltage
P04.32~100.0%(the rated voltage of
motor)
100.0%

156
Function
code
Name
value
P04.32 Output minimum voltage 0.0%~P04.31(the rated voltage of motor) 0.0%
7.5 Torque control
Goodrive300 series inverters support two kinds of control mode: torque control and rotation speed
control. The core of rotation speed is that the whole control focuses on the stable speed and
ensures the setting speed is the same as the actual running speed. The Max. Load sould be in the
range of the torque limit. The core of torque control is that the whole control focues on the stable
torque and ensures the setting torque is the same as the actual output torque. At the same time,
the output frequency is among the upper limit or the lower limit.
Function
code
Default
value
P00.00
Speed control
mode
0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying
to AM,SM)
1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 (applying
to AM)
Note:AM-Asynchronous motor SM-
synchronous motor
0
P03.11
Torque setting
method
2:Analog AI1 setting torque(100% corresponds
to 3 times of the motor current)
0

157
Function
code
Default
value
5:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque(100%
corresponds to 3 times of the motor current)
6: Multi-stage torque setting(100% corresponds
torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the
motor current)
torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the
motor current)
9:Ethernet communication setting torque(100%
10:CAN communication setting torque(100%
P03.12
Keypad setting
torque
-300.0%~300.0%( the rated current of the
motor)
50.0%
P03.13
Torque given filter
time
0.000~10.000s
0
P03.14
Torque control
forward rotation
upper-limit
frequency setting
source selection
0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.16)
(100% corresponds to the max. frequency)
frequency(100% corresponds to the max.
frequency)
frequency)
0

158
Function
code
Default
value
frequency)
5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit
frequency)
frequency)
frequency (100% corresponds to the max.
frequency)
frequency)
frequency)
P03.15
Torque control
reverse rotation
upper-limit
frequency setting
source selection
(100% corresponds to the max. frequency)
frequency)
frequency)
frequency)
5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit
frequency)
0

159
Function
code
Default
value
frequency)
frequency)
frequency)
frequency)
P03.16
Torque control
forward rotation
upper-limit
frequency keypad
defined value
P03.17
Torque control
reverse rotation
upper-limit
frequency keypad
defined value
0.00 Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 50.00 Hz
P03.18
Electromotion
torque upper-limit
setting source
selection
(100% corresponds to three times of the rated
frequency(100% corresponds to three times of
the rated current of the motor)
0

160
Function
code
Default
value
frequency (100% corresponds to three times of
P03.19
Brake torque
upper-limit setting
source selection
(100% corresponds to three times of the rated
0

161
Function
code
Default
value
P03.20
Electromotion
torque upper-limit
keypad setting
0.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor) 180.0%
P03.21
Brake torque
upper-limit keypad
setting
0.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor) 180.0%
P17.07 Output torque -250.0~250.0% 0.0%
P17.15 Torque given value -300.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor)
7.6 Parameters of the motor
²Physical accident may occur if the motor starts up suddenly during
autotune. Please check the safety of surrounding environment of the
motor and the load before autotune.
²The power is still applied even the motor stops running during static
autotune. Please do not touch the motor until the autotune is
completed, otherwise there would be electric shock.
²Do not carry out the rotation autotune if the motor is coupled with the
load, please do not operate on the rotation autotune. Otherwise
misaction or damage may occur to the inverter or the mechanical
devices. When carry out autotune on the motor which is coupled with
load, the motor parameter won’t be counted correctly and misaction
may occur. It is proper to de-couple the motor from the load during
autotune when necessary.
Goodrive300 series inverters can drive both asynchronous motors and synchronous motors. And

162
at the same time, they can support two sets of motor parameters which can shift between two
motors through multi-function digital input terminal or communication.
The control performance of the inverter is based on the established accurate motor model. The
user has to carry out the motor autotune before first running (take motor 1 as the example).
Note:
1. Set the motor parameters according to the name plate of the motor.
2. During the motor autotune, de-couple the motor form the load if rotation autotune is selected to
make the motor is in a static and empty state, otherwise the result of autotune is incorrect. The
asynchronous motors can autotune the parameters of P02.06~P02.10, while the synchronous
motors can autotune the parameters of P02.20~P02.23.
3. During the motor autotune, do not to de-couple the motor form the load if static autotune is
selected. Because only some parameters of the motor are involved, the control performance is not
as better as the rotation autotune. The asynchronous motors can autotune the parameters of
P02.06~P02.10, while the synchronous motors can autotune the parameters of P02.20~P02.22.
P02.23 (synchronous motor 1 counter-electromotive force constant) can be counted to attain.
4. Motor autotune only involves the current motor. Switch the motor through P08.31 to carry out the
autotune on the other motor.
Relative parameters list:

163
Function
code
Default
value
P00.01
Running command
channel
channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” light off)
(“LOCAL/REMOT” flickering)
channel (“LOCAL/REMOT” on)；
0
P00.15
Motor parameter
autotuning
0:No operation
2:Static autotuning
0
P02.00 Motor type 1
1:Synchronous motor
0
P02.01
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P02.02
rated power
0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max frequency) 50.00Hz
P02.03
rated speed
1~36000rpm
Depend
on
module
P02.04
rated voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
P02.05
rated current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
P02.06
stator resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
P02.07
rotor resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module

164
Function
code
Default
value
P02.08
leakage inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
P02.09
Asynchronous motor
1mutual inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
P02.10
non-load current
0.1~6553.5A
Depend
on
module
P02.15
Synchronous motor 1
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P02.16
Synchronous motor 1
rated frequency
P02.17
Synchronous motor 1
number of poles pairs
1~50 2
P02.18
Synchronous motor 1
rated voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
P02.19
Synchronous motor 1
rated current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
P02.20
Synchronous motor 1
stator resistor
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
P02.21
Synchronous motor 1
direct axis inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
P02.22
Synchronous motor 1
quadrature axis
inductance
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module

165
Function
code
Default
value
Back EMF constant
P05.01~P0
5.09
terminals
(S1~S8, HDI) function
selection
35: Shift from motor 1 to motor 2
P08.31
The shifting channel
between motor 1 and
motor 2
0:Terminals shifting, the digital terminal is
selected as 351:MODBUS
communication shifting
2:PROFIBUS communication shifting
0
P12.00 Motor type 2
1:Synchronous motor
0
P12.01
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P12.02
rated frequency
P12.03
rated speed
1~36000rpm
Depend
on
module
P12.04
rated
voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
P12.05
rated
current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
P12.06
rotor resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
P12.07
stator resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
P12.08 Asynchronous motor 2 0.1~655.35mH Depend

166
Function
code
Default
value
leakage on
module
P12.09
mutual induction
0.1~655.35mH
Depend
on
module
P12.10
noload current
0.1~6553.5A
Depend
on
module
P12.15
Synchronous motor 2
rated power
0.1~3000.0kW
Depend
on
module
P12.16
Synchronous motor 2
rated
frequency
P12.17
Synchronous motor 2
pority pairs
1~50 2
P12.18
Synchronous motor 2
rated voltage
0~1200V
Depend
on
module
P12.19
Synchronous motor 2
rated
current
0.8~6000.0A
Depend
on
module
P12.20
Synchronous motor 2
rotor resistance
0.001~65.535Ω
Depend
on
module
P12.21
Synchronous motor 2
d-axis inductor
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module
P12.22
Synchronous motor 2
quadrature axis inductor
0.1~6553.5mH
Depend
on
module

167
Function
code
Default
value
counter-electromotive
force
constant
7.7 Start-up and stop control
The start-up and stop control of the inverter includes three states: start after the running command
during normal powering on, start after the restarting function becomes valid during normal
powering on and start after the automatic fault reset. Below is the detailed instruction for three
startings.
There are three starting methods for the inverter: start from the starting frequency directly, start
after the DC braking and start after the rotation speed tracking. The user can select according to
different situations to meet their needs.
For the load with big inertia, especially in the cases where the reverse rotation may occur, it is
better to select starting after DC braking and then starting after rotation speed tracking.
Note: it is recommended to use the direct starting to drive synchronous motor.
1. The starting logic figure of starting after the running command during the normal powering on
2. The starting logic figure of starting after the restarting function becomes valid during the normal
powering on

168
3. The starting logic figure of starting after the automatic fault reset
Function
code
Default
value
P00.01
Running command
channel
channel(LED light off)
(LED flickering)
channel (LED on)
0
P00.11
ACC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
module
P00.12
DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
module
P01.00 Start method 0:Start-up directly 0

169
Function
code
Default
value
1:Start-up after DC braking
2: Start-up after rotation speed tracking 1
3: Start-up after rotation speed tracking 2
P01.01
Starting frequency of
direct start-up
0.00~50.00Hz
0.50Hz
P01.02
Retention time of the
starting frequency
0.0~50.0s
0.0s
P01.03
The braking current before
starting
0.0~150.0%
0.0%
P01.04
The braking time before
starting
0.0~50.0s
0.0s
P01.05
ACC/DEC manner
selection
0:Linear type
1:S curve type
0
P01.06
The starting stage
proporation of S curve
0.0~50.0%(ACC/DEC time)
30.0%
P01.07
The ending stage
proporation of S curve
0.0~50.0%(ACC/DEC time)
30.0%
P01.08 Stop manner selection
0:Decelerate to stop
1:Coast to stop
0
P01.09
Starting frequency of DC
braking
P01.10
Waiting time before DC
braking
0.0~50.0s 0.0s
P01.11 DC braking current 0.0~150.0% 0.0%
P01.12 DC braking time 0.0~50.0s 0.0s
P01.13
Dead time of for/rev
rotation
0.0~3600.0s 0.0s
P01.14
Swtiching between for/rev
rotation
0:Switch after 0 frequency
1:Switch after the starting frequency
0
P01.15 Stopping speed 0.00~100.00Hz 0.10 Hz
P01.16 Detection of stopping 0: Speed setting (the only detection 0

170
Function
code
Default
value
speed method in V/F mode)
1: Speed detecting value
P01.17
The delay time of the
stopping speed
0.00~10.00 s 0.05s
P01.18
Terminal
running protection slection
when powering on
0:The terminal running command is
invalid when powering on
1: The terminal running command is
valid when powering on
0
P01.19
The running frequency is
lower than the lower limit
one (valid if the lower limit
frequency is above 0)
0: Run at the lower-limit frequency
1: Stop
2: Hibernation
0
P01.20
Hibernation restore delay
time
0.0~3600.0s(valid when P01.15=2) 0.0s
P01.21 Restart after power off
0: Disable
1: Enable
0
P01.22
The waiting time of restart
after power off
0.0~3600.0s(valid when P01.17=1) 1.0s
P01.23 Start delay time 0.0~60.0s 0.0s
P05.01~P0
5.09
Digital input function
selection
6: Coast to stop
7: Fault reset
8: Operation pause
21:ACC/DEC time option１
22:ACC/DEC time option２
P08.06 Jogging running frequency 0.00~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 5.00Hz
P08.07
Jogging running ACC time
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on

171
Function
code
Default
value
module
P08.08
Jogging running DEC time
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.00
ACC time 2
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.01
DEC time 2
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.02
ACC time 3
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.03
DEC time 3
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.04
ACC time 4
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.05
DEC time 4
0.0~3600.0s Depend
on
module
P08.28 Times of fault reset 0~10 0
P08.29
Interval time of automatic
fault reset
0.1~100.0s 1.0s
7.8 Frequency setting
Goodrive300 series inverters can set the frequency by various means. The given channel can be
divided into main given channel and assistant given channel.
There are two main given channels: A frequency given channel and B frequency given channel.
These two given channels can carry out mutual simple math calculation between each other. And
the given channels can be shifted dynamically through set multi- function terminals.

172
There are three assistant given channels: keypad UP/DOWN input, terminals UP/DOWN switch
input and digital potentiometer input. The three ways equal to the effect of input UP/DOWN given in
internal assistant given of the inverter. The user can enable the given method and the effect of the
method to the frequency given by setting function codes.
The actual given of the inverter is consisted of main given channel and assistant given channel.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Keypad
AI1
PROFIBUS
MODBUS
PID
Multi-stage speed
Simple PLC
HDI
AI3
AI2
Erthernet
CAN
UP terminal
DOWN terminal
Digital
potentiometer
P08.43 tens setting
(frequency control selection)
P08.41 tens setting
(frequency control selection)
P17.13
Keypad digital
adjustment
P08.41 unit
UP/DOWN
Digital potentiometer
enabling
P08.43 unit
UP/DOWN terminal valid
selection
0 1
UP/DOWN enabling
Digital potentiometer
enabling
0
P00.03
1
A
frequ
ency
com
man
d
+
+
(the Max. output frequency)
0
UP/DOWN enabling
0
valid
invalid
valid
Invalid
Terminal function 12
Frequency increasing/decreasing
setting temporal clear
Terminal function 33
Frequency increasing/decreasing
setting temporal clear
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Keypad
AI1
PROFIBUS
MODBUS
PID
Multi-stage speed
Simple PLC
HDI
AI3
AI2
Erthernet
CAN
P00.06
(A frequency command selection)
P00.07
B frequency command selection
P00.09
(the setting source combination)
P00.05 (the lower limit of the running
frequency)
P17.00
Setting
frequency
A
B
A+B
A-B
Max A B
Min A B
+
+
P17.02
Ramp given frequency
P00.08 (B frequency command reference selection)
Keypad setting frequency
0
1
2
3
4
5
P00.10
P00.10
Keypad setting frequency
P00.04 (the upper limit of the running
frequency)
Goodrive300 series inverters support the shifting between different given channels, and the
detailed shifting rules is as below:

173
Current given
channel
P00.09
Multi-function
terminal function
13
Shifting from A
channel to B
channel
Multi-function
terminal function
14
Shifting from
combination
setting to A
channel
Multi-function
terminal function
15
Shifting from
combination
setting to B
channel
A B / /
B / / /
A+B / A B
A-B / A B
Max（A,B） / A B
Min（A,B） / A B
Note: “/” means the multi-function terminal is invalid under the current given channel.
When select multi-function terminal UP (10) and DOWN (11) to set the internal assistant frequency,
P08.44 and P08.45 can be set to increase or decrease the set frequency quickly.
Sx
Sy
Up terminal function selection=10
DOWN terminal function
selection=11
UP terminal state
DOWN terminal state
T
F
T
T
UP terminal frequency increasing integral rate P08.44
DOWNterminal frequency increasing integral rate P08.45
Function
code
Name
value
P00.03 Max. output frequency P00.04~400.00Hz 50.00Hz
P00.04
Upper limit of the running
frequency
P00.05~P00.03
50.00Hz
P00.05
Lower limit of the running
frequency
0.00Hz~P00.04
0.00Hz
P00.06
A frequency command
selection
0

174
Function
code
Name
value
10:Ethernet communication
setting(reserved)
11:CAN communication
setting(reserved)
P00.07
B frequency command
selection
setting(reserved)
11:CAN communication
setting(reserved)
1
P00.08
B frequency command
reference selection
0:The Max. output frequency
1:A frequency command
0
P00.09
Combination type of the
setting source
0:A
1:B
2:（A+B）combination
0

175
Function
code
Name
value
3:（A-B）combination
4:Max（A,B）combination
5:Min（A,B）combination
P05.01~P0
5.09
terminals
(S1~S8,HDI) function
selection
11:Decreasing frequency
setting(DOWN)
14:Shift between combination setting
and A setting
and B setting
P08.42 Keypad data control setting
0x000~0x1223
LED ones:frequency enable selection
0:Both ∧ / ∨ keys and digital
potentiometer adjustments are effective
1:Only ∧ / ∨ keys adjustments is
effective
2:Only digital potentiometer adjustments
is effective
3:Neither ∧ / ∨ keys nor digital
potentiometer adjustments are effective
0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or
P00.07=0
1:Effective for all frequency setting
manner
2:Ineffective for multi-stage speed when
multi-stage speed has the priority
LED hundreds: action selection during
stopping
0:Setting is valid
0x0000

176
Function
code
Name
value
1:Valid during running, cleared after
stopping
2:Valid during running, cleared after
receiving the stop command
LED thousands: ∧/∨ keys and digital
potentiometer Integral function
0:The Integral function is effective
1:The Integral function is ineffective
P08.43
Keypad data potentiometer
integral ratio
0.01~10.00s 0.10s
P08.44
UP/DOWN terminals
control setting
0x00~0x221
LED ones: frequency control
selection
0:UP/DOWN terminals setting effective
1:UP/DOWN terminals setting ineffective
LED tens: frequency control
selection
0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or
P00.07=0
1:All frequency means are effective
2:When the multi-stage are priority, it is
ineffective to the multi-stage
LED hundreds: action selection when
stop
0:Setting effective
1:Effective in the running, clear after stop
2:Efective in the running, clear after
receiving the stop commands
0x000
P08.45
UP terminals frequency
increasing integral ratio
0.01~50.00Hz/s 0.50s
P08.46
DOWN terminals
frequency integral ratio
0.01~50.00 Hz/s 0.50s

177
Function
code
Name
value
P17.00
Set frequency 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output
frequency)
0.00Hz
P17.02
Ramp given frequency 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output
frequency)
0.00Hz
P17.14 Digital adjustment 0.00Hz~P00.03
7.9 Analog input
Goodrive300 series inverters have three analog input terminals and 1 high-speed pulse input
terminals (of which, AI1 and AI2 are 0~10V/0~20mA and Al can select voltage input or current input
by J1, A2 can select voltage input or current input by J2 and AI3 is for -10~10V ) as the standard
configuration. The inputs can be filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
AI1
AI3
HDI
P05.32
P05.33
P05.34
P05.35
P05.42
P05.43
P05.44
P05.45
P05.46
P05.47
P05.50
P05.51
P05.52
P05.53
P05.48
P05.36
P05.54
P17.15
P17.17
P17.18
AI2
P05.37
P05.38
P05.39
P05.40
P05.41
P17.16
P05.00
HDI input type selection
0
1
1
2
0
P05.49
HDI high speed pulse input function selection
AI1 input voltage
AI2 input voltage
AI3 input voltage
HDI input frequency
AI3
AI1/AI2/HDI
P05.00
0: HDI is high speed pulse input
1: HDI is switch input
P05.49
0: frequency setting input
1: counter input
2: length counter input
Analog curve input setting Analog input filter
Function
code
Default
value
P05.00 HDI input type selection
0:HDI is high pulse input
0
P05.32 Lower limit of AI1 0.00V~P05.25 0.00V
P05.33
Corresponding setting of
the lower limit of AI1
-100.0%~100.0%
0.0%

178
Function
code
Default
value
P05.34 Upper limit of AI1 P05.23~10.00V 10.00V
P05.35
the upper limit of AI1
-100.0%~100.0%
100.0%
P05.36 AI1 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s
P05.37
Lower limit of
AI2
0.00V~P05.30
0.00V
P05.38
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
P05.40
-100.0%~100.0% 100.0%
P05.42
Lower limit of
AI3
-10.00V~P05.35 -10.00V
P05.43
-100.0%~100.0% -100.0%
P05.44 middle value of AI3 P05.33~P05.37 0.00V
P05.45
Corresponding middle
setting of AI3
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
P05.47
-100.0%~100.0% 100.0%
P05.49
HDI high-speed pulse
input function
selection
0:Fquency setting input, frequency
setting source
1:Cunter input, high-speed pulse counter
input terminals
2:Length counting input, length counter
input terminals
0
P05.50
Lower limit frequency of
HDI
0.00 kHz ~ P05.43 0.00kHz

179
Function
code
Default
value
P05.51
HDI low frequency setting
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
P05.52
Upper limit frequency of
HDI
P05.41 ~50.00kHz 50.00kHz
P05.53
upper limit frequency of
HDI
-100.0%~100.0% 100.0%
P05.54
HDI frequency input filter
time
0.000s~10.000s 0.100s
7.10 Analog output
Goodrive300 series inverters have 2 analog output terminals (0~10V or 0~20mA) and 1 high speed
pulse output terminal. Analog output signals can be filtered separately and the maximum and
minimum values can be adjusted. The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed,
output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc.
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
20
P06.14
P06.15
P06.16
AO1
AO2
HDO
P06.17
P06.18
P06.19
P06.20
P06.22
P06.23
P06.24
P06.25
P06.27
P06.28
P06.29
P06.30
P06.26
P06.21
P06.31
(default value is 0)
P06.00
HDI output type selection
0 Running frequency 1 Set frequency
3 Running rotation speed 4 Output current (relative to the inverter)
6 Output voltage 7 Output power
9 Output torque 10 Analog AI1 input value
12 Analog AI3 input value 13 HDI input value
15 MODBUS communication setting 2 16 PROFIBUS communication setting 1
2 Ramp given frequency
5 Output current (relative to the motor)
8 Set torque
11 Analog AI2 input value
14 MODBUS communication setting 1
17 PROFIBUS communication setting 1
18 Torque current (relative to the nominal
19 Exciting current (relative to the nominal
20 Reserved
0
1
P06.00
0: open collector high speed pulse
output
1: open collector output
P06.01 P06.02 P06.03 P06.04 output selection
Analog output curve settingAnalog output selection Analog output filter setting
Output instructions:

180
Set value Function Instructions
0 Running frequency 0~the Max. output frequency
1 Set frequency 0~ the Max. output frequency
2 Ramp given frequency 0~ the Max. output frequency
3 Running rotation speed
0~2 times of the rated synchronous rotation speed of
the motor
4
Output current (relative to the
inverter)
0~2 times of the rated current of the inverter
5
Output current (relative to the
motor)
0~2 times of the rated current of the inverter
6 Output voltage 0~1.5 times of the rated voltage of the inverter
7 Output power 0~2 times of the rated power
8 Set torque 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor
9 Output torque 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor
10 AI1 0~10V/0~20mA
11 AI2 0~10V/0~20mA
12 AI3 -10V~10V
13 HDI 0.00~50.00kHz
14
MODBUS communication set
value 1
-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%
15
MODBUS communication set
value 2
-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%
16
PROFIBUS communication
set value 1
-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%
17
PROFIBUS communication
set value 2
-1000~1000,100 corresponds to 100.0%
18
Torque current(relative to the
rated current of the motor)
0~2 times of the rated current of the motor
19
Exciting current (relative to
the rated current of the
motor)
0~2 times of the rated current of the motor
20 Reserved

181
Function
code
Name
value
P06.00 HDO output type
0:Open collector pole high speed pulse
output
1: Open collector pole output
0
P06.14 AO1 output selection 0:Running frequency
1:Set frequency
2:Ramp reference frequency
3:Running rotation speed
4:Output current (relative to the rated
current of the inverter)
5:Output current(relative to the rated
6:Output voltage
7:Output power
8:Set torque value
9:Output torque
10:Analogy AI1 input value
13:High speed pulse HDI input value
16:PROFIBUS communication set value
1
17:PROFIBUS communication set value
2
18:Torque current(relative to the rated
19:Pre-magnetizing current(relative to
20:Reserved
0
P06.15 AO2 output selection 0
P06.16
HDO high-speed pulse
output selection
0
P06.17 Lower limit of AO1 output 0.0%~P06.15 0.0%
P06.18 Corresponding AO1 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V

182
Function
code
Name
value
output to the lower limit
P06.19 Upper limit of AO1 output P06.13~100.0% 100.0%
P06.20
The corresponding AO1
output to the upper limit
0.00V~10.00V
10.00V
P06.21 AO1 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s
P06.22 Lower limit of AO2 output 0.0%~P06.20 0.0%
P06.23
Corresponding AO2
0.00V~10.00V
0.00V
P06.24 Upper limit of AO2 output P06.18~100.0% 100.0%
P06.25
Corresponding AO2
0.00V~10.00V
10.00V
P06.26 AO2 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s
P06.27 Lower limit of HDO output 0.0%~P06.25 0.00%
P06.28
Corresponding HDO
0.00~50.00kHz
0.0kHz
P06.29 Upper limit of HDO output P06.23~100.0% 100.0%
P06.30
Corresponding HDO
0.00~50.00kHz
50.00kHz
P06.31 HDO output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s
7.11 Digital input
Goodrive300 series inverters have 8 programmable digital input terminals and 1 open-collector
output terminal in the standard configuration. All functions of the digital input terminals are
programmable by the function codes. Open collector pole input can be selected into high speed
pulse input terminal or common switch input terminal by function code. When selected into HDI,
the user can select HDI high speed pulse input as frequency given, counting input or length pulse
input by setting.

183
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
HD1
P05.10
P05.01
P05.02
P05.03
P05.04
P05.05
P05.06
P05.07
P05.08
P05.09
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
P05.15
P05.17
P05.19
P05.21
P05.23
P05.25
P05.27
P05.29
P05.31
0
1
2
3
4
5
.
.
.
.
29
30
P05.11
P05.00
0
1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
0
1 -1
P17.11
Switch input terminal
state
0 No function 1 Forward running
4 Forward jogging 5 Reverse jogging
8 Running pause 9 External fault input
12
Frequency increasing/decreasing setting
clear
13
Shifting between A frequency and B
frequency
16 Multi-stage speed terminal 1 17 Multi-stage speed terminal 2
20 Multi-stage speed pause 21 ACC/DEC time selection 1
2 Reverse running
6 Coast to stop
10 Frequency setting increasing (UP)
14
Shifting between the combination setting
and A frequency
18 Multi-stage speed terminal 3
22 ACC/DEC time selection 2
23 Simple PLC pause 25 PID control pause
28 Counter reset 29 Torque control disabling
26
Traverse pause (stop at the current
frequency)
30 ACC/DEC disabling
32 Length reset 33
Frequency increasing/decreasing setting
clear
34 DC braking
3 3-wire running control
7 Fault reset
11 Frequency setting decreasing (DOWN)
15
Shifting between the combination setting
and B frequency
23 Simple PLC stopping reset
27
Traverse reset (stop at the middle
frequency)
31 Counter trigging
35 Shift from motor 1 to motor 2
36 Shift the command to the keypad 37 Shift the command to the terminal 38 Shift the command to the communication 39 Pre-exciting command
40 Power consumption clear 41 Power consumption keeping 42~63 Reserved
P07.37
The current fault
switch input terminal
state
Fault?
S1 BIT0 S2 BIT1
S3 BIT2 S4 BIT3
S5 BIT4 S6 BIT5
S7 BIT6 S8 BIT7
HDI BIT8
P05.10 P17.11 P07.37 display
P05.00
0: HDI is high speed pulse input
1: HDI is switch input
Fault
Running
Switch function selection
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
T delay
P05.14
P05.16
P05.18
P05.20
P05.22
P05.24
P05.26
P05.28
P05.30
These parameters are used to set the function corresponds to the digital multi-function terminals.
Note: two different multi-function terminals can not be set as one function.
Set
value
Function Instructions
0 No function
The inverter does not work even there is input signal.
It is necessary to set the terminal which can not be
used to non-function to avoid misacting.
1 Forward running(FWD) The forward or reverse rotation of the inverter can be
controlled by the external terminals.2 Reverse running(REV)
3 3-wire running control
The terminal can determine the running mode of the
inverter is 3-wire control mode. Refer to P05.13 for
detailed instruction of 3-wire control mode.
4 Forward jogging See P08.06, P08.07 and P08.08 for jogging
frequency, jogging ACC/DEC time.5 Reverse jogging
6 Coast to stop
The inverter closes off the output. The motor is not
controlled by the inverter during the stopping. This
method is usually to be used when the load inertia is
big and it has no requirement to the stopping time.
It has the same meaning with the “coast to stop” in
P01.08 and usually used in remote control.

184
Set
value
7 Fault reset
External fault reset. It has the same function with the
reset function of STOP/RST on the keypad. This
function can realize remote fault reset.
8 Operation pause
The inverter decelerates to stop. But all running
parameters are in the memory state. For example,
PLC parameters, traverse parameters and PID
parameters. After the signal disappears, the inverter
will come back to the state before stopping.
9 External fault input
When the external fault signal is sent to the inverter,
the inverter will report the fault and stop.
10 Frequency setting up(UP) This parameter is used to modify the increasing and
decreasing command during the external terminal
given frequency.
Frequency increasing/decreasing setting clear
terminal can cancel the assistant channel frequency
set by the internal UP/DOWN of the inverter to make
the given frequency restore to the frequency given by
the main given frequency channel.
12
Frequency setting
down(DOWN)
12
Frequency
increasing/decreasing setting
clear
13
Shifting between A setting
and B setting
This function can realize the shifting between the
frequency setting channels.
The 13th
function can realize the shifting between A
frequency given channel and B frequency given
channel.
The 14th
function can realize the shifting between A
frequency given channel and the combination setting
channel set by P00.09
14
Shifting between A setting
and combination setting
15
Shifting between B setting
and combination setting

185
Set
value
The 15th
function can realize the shifting between B
frequency given channel and the combination setting
channel set by P00.09
16 Multi-stage speed terminal 1 The 16 stage speeds can be set by the combination of
digital state of four terminals.
Note: multi-stage speed 1is the low position,
multi-stage speed 4 is the high position.
Multi-stag
e speed 4
Multi-stag
e speed 3
Multi-stag
e speed 2
Multi-stage
speed 1
BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
20 Multi-stage speed pause
Shield the multi-stage speed selection terminal
function to keep the setting value at the current state.
21 ACC/DEC time selection 1 Select 4 ACC/DEC time by the combination of the 2
terminals.
Terminal
1
Terminal
2
ACC/DEC time
selection
Corresponding
parameter
OFF OFF ACC/DEC time 1 P00.11/P00.12
ON OFF ACC/DEC time 2 P08.00/P08.01
OFF ON ACC/DEC time 3 P08.02/P08.03
ON ON ACC/DEC time 4 P08.04/P08.05
22 ACC/DEC time selection 2
23 Simple PLC stop reset
Restart simple PLC and clear the memory state of
PLC.
24 Simple PLC pause
Program pause during PLC implement. Run at the
current speed stage. After cancel the function, simple
PLC continues to run.
25 PID control pause
Temporal PID invalid and the inverter will output at the
current frequency.
26
Traverse pause (stop at the
current frequency)
The inverter will stop at the current output and after
canceling the function, the inverter will continue to
traverse run at the current frequency.
27 Traverse reset (return to the The setting frequency of the inverter will come back to

186
Set
value
middle frequency) the middle frequency.
28 Counter reset Counter clear
29 Torque control enabling
The inverter shifts from torque control mode to speed
control mode.
30 ACC/DEC disabling
Ensure the inverter will not be affected by the external
signals (except for the stopping command) and keep
the current output frequency.
31 Counter trigging Enable the pulse counter.
32 Length reset Length counter clear
33
Frequency
increasing/decreasing setting
temporal clear
When the terminal closes, the frequency set by
UP/DOWN can be cleared. All set frequency will be
restored into the given frequency by the frequency
command channel and the frequency will come back
to the value after the frequency increasing or
decreasing.
34 DC braking
The inverter will begin DC braking after the valid
command.
35
Shifting between motor1 and
motor2
Motor-shifting can be controlled after the terminal is
valid.
36
Shift the command to the
keypad
After the function terminal become valid, the running
command channel will be shifted into keypad running
command channel and the running command channel
will come back to the original state if the function
terminal is invalid.
37
terminals
command channel will be shifted into terminal running
command channel and the running command channel
will come back to the original state if the function
38
communication
command channel will be shifted into communication
running command channel and the running command

187
Set
value
channel will come back to the original state if the
function terminal is invalid.
39 Pre-excitation command
Perform pre-exciting if the terminal is valid until the
40 Power consumption clear
The power consumption will be cleared after the
command is valid.
41 Power consumption retention
If the command is valid, the current running of the
inverter will not affect its power consumption.
42~60 Reversed
Function
code
Default
value
0
P05.01 S1 terminals function
selection
0: No function
3: 3-wire control operation
6: Coast to stop
7: Fault reset
8: Operation pause
9: External fault input
11:Decreasing frequency
setting(DOWN)
and A setting
1
selection
4
selection
7
selection
0
selection
0
selection
0
selection
0
P05.08
S8 terminals function
selection
0
P05.09 HDI terminals function 0

188
Function
code
Default
value
selection and B setting
21:ACC/DEC time option 1
22:ACC/DEC time option 2
24:Simple PLC pause
25:PID control pause
26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current
frequency)
27:Traverse reset(return to the center
frequency)
28:Counter reset
29:Torque control prohibition
31:Counter trigger
32:Length reset
temporally
34:DC brake
35:Shift the motor 1 into moor 2
38:Shift the command to the
communication
39:Pre-magnetized command
40:Clear the power
41:Keep the power
42~63:Reserved

189
Function
code
Default
value
P05.10
Polarity selection of the
input terminals
0x000~0x1FF 0x000
P05.11 Switch filter time 0.000~1.000s 0.010s
P05.12 Virtual terminals setting
0:Virtual terminals is invalid
1:MODBUS communication virtual
terminals are valid
2:PROFIBUS communication virtual
terminals are valid
0
P05.13
Terminals control running
mode
0:2-wire control 1
1:2-wire control 2
2:3-wire control 1
3:3-wire control 2
0
P05.14 S1 terminal switching on
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.15 S1
terminal switching off
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.17 S2
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.19 S3
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.21 S4
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s

190
Function
code
Default
value
P05.22 S5
terminal switching on
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.23 S5
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.24 S6
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.25 S6
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.26 S7
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.27 S7
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.28 S8
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.29 S8
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.30 HDI
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P05.31 HDI
delay time
0.000~50.000s
0.000s
P07.37 Current fault bus voltage 0
P17.12 Switch input terminals 0

191
Function
code
Default
value
state
7.12 Digital output
Goodrive300 series inverters have 2 relay output terminals and 1 open-collector output terminal
and 1 high speed pulse output terminal in the standard configuration. All functions of the digital
input terminals are programmable by the function codes. Open collector pole output can be
selected into high speed pulse input terminal or common switch input terminal by function code.
The below table is the option of the four function parameters and selecting the repeated output
terminal function is allowed.
0 Invalid The output terminal has no function.
1 Running
Output ON signal when the inverter is running and
there is frequency output.
2 Forward running
Output ON signal when the inverter is running
forward and there is frequency output.
3 Reverse running
Output ON signal when the inverter is running
reverse and there is frequency output.
4 Jogging
Output ON signal when the inverter is jogging and
there is frequency output.
5 Inverter fault Output ON signal when the inverter is in fault
6 FDT1
Please refer to P08.32 and P08.33 for detailed
information.
7 FDT2
Please refer to P08.34 and P08.35 for detailed
information.
8 Frequency arrival Please refer to P08.36 for detailed information.
9 Zero-speed running
Output ON signal when the output frequency and
given frequency of the inverter is 0 at the same
time.
10 Upper-limit frequency arrival
Output ON signal when the running frequency of the
inverter is the upper limit frequency.
11 Upper-limit frequency arrival
Output ON signal when the running frequency of the
inverter is the lower limit frequency.

192
12 Ready
When the main circuit and the control circuit is
established and the protection function of the
inverter is not active. The inverter is in the running
state and it will output ON signal.
13 Pre-exciting
Output ON signal when the inverter is in the
pre-exciting state.
14 Overload pre-alarm
Output ON signal if the inverter is beyond the
pre-alarm point. Refer to P11.08~P11.10 for the
detailed instruction.
15 Underload pre-alarm
Output ON signal if the inverter is beyond the
pre-alarm point. Refer to P11.11~P11.12 for the
detailed instruction.
16 Simple PLC stage completion Output signal if the simple PLC stage is completed.
17 Simple PLC cycle completion
Output signal if the 1 simple PLC cycle is
completed.
18 Set counting arrival
Output ON signal if the detected counting exceeds
the set value of P08.25.
19 Fixed counting arrival
Output ON signal if the detected counting exceeds
the set value of P08.26.
20 External fault valid Output ON signal if external fault occurs.
21 Length arrival
Output ON signal if the actual detected length
exceeds the se length by P08.19.
22 Running time arrival
Output ON signal if the accumulative running time
of the inverter exceeds the setting time by P08.27.
23
MODBUS communication
virtual terminal output
Output corresponding signal according to the
setting value of MODBUS. Output ON signal if the
setting value is 1 and output OFF signal if the
setting value is 0.
24
POROFIBUS communication
virtual terminal output
Output corresponding signal according to the
setting value of PROFIBUS. Output ON signal if the
setting value is 1 and output OFF signal if the
setting value is 0.

193
25~30 Reserved
Function
code
Default
value
P06.00 HDO output type
0:Open collector pole high speed pulse
output
1: Open collector pole output
0
P06.01 Y output selection 0:Invalid
1:On operation
2:Forward rotation operation
3:Reverse rotation operation
4: Jogging operation
5:The inverter fault
6:FDT1
7:FDT2
8:Frequency arrival
9:Zero speed running
10:Upper limit frequency arrival
11:Lower limit frequency arrival
12:Ready for operation
13:Pre-magnetizing
14:Ooverload pre-alarm
15: Uunderload pre-alarm
16:Ccompletion of simple PLC stage
19:Defined count value arrival
20:External fault valid
21:Length arrival
22:Running time arrival
23:MODBUS communication virtual
terminals output
24:PROFIBUS communication virtual
0
P06.02 HDO output selection 0
P06.03
Relay RO1 output
selection
1
P06.04
Relay RO2 output
selection
5

194
Function
code
Default
value
terminals output
25~30:Reserved
P06.05
Polarity selection of output
terminals
0x00~0x0F 0x00
P06.06 Y switching on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P06.07 Y switching off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P06.08
HDO switching on delay
time
0.000~50.000s(valid only when
P06.00=1)
0.000s
P06.09
HDO switching off delay
time
0.000~50.000s(valid only when
P06.00=1)
0.000s
P06.10
RO1 switching on delay
time
0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P06.11
RO1 switching off delay
time
0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P06.12
RO2 switching on delay
time
0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P06.13
RO2 switching off delay
time
0.000~50.000s 0.000s
P07.38
Output terminals state at
the current fault
0
P17.13
Switch output terminals
state
0
7.13 Simple PLC
Simple PLC function is also a multi-stage speed generator. The inverter can change the running
frequency, direction to meet the need of processing according to the running time automatically. In
the past, this function needs to be assisted by external PLC, but now the inverter can realize this
function by itself.
The series inverters can control 16-stage speed with 4 groups of ACC/DEC time.
The multi-function digital output terminals or multi-function relay output an ON signal when the set
PLC finishes a circle (or a stage).

195
Function
code
Default
value
P10.00 Simple PLC means
0:Stop after running once
1:Run at the final value after running
once
2:Cycle running
0
P10.01
Simple PLC memory
selection
0:Power loss without memory
1:Power loss memory
0
P10.02 Multi-stage speed 0 -100.0~100.0% 0.0%
P10.03 The running time of stage
0
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
P10.05 The running time of stage 1 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s
P10.07 The running time of stage 2 0.0~6553.5s（min） 0.0s

196
Function
code
Default
value
10
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
11
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
12
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
13
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
14
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
15
0.0~6553.5s(min)
0.0s
P10.36
PLC restart manner
selection
0:Restart from the first stage
1:Continue to run from the stop
frequency
0
P10.34
Simple PLC 0~7 stage
ACC/DEC time selection
0x0000~0XFFFF 0000
P10.35 Simple PLC 8~15 stage 0x0000~0XFFFF 0000

197
Function
code
Default
value
P05.01~P0
5.09
selection
24:Simple PLC pause
P06.01~P0
6.04
Digital outnput function
selection
15: Underload pre-alarm
16:Completion of simple PLC stage
P17.00 Set frequency
0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output
frequency)
0.00Hz
P17.27
Simple PLC and the
current stage of the
multi-stage speed
7.14 Multi-stage speed running
Set the parameters when the inverter carries out multi-stage speed running. Goodrive300 series
inverters can set 16 stage speed which can be selected by the combination code of multi-stage
speed terminals 1~4. They correspond to multi-stage speed 0 to 15.

198
Function
code
Default
value

199
Function
code
Default
value
P10.34
0x0000~0XFFFF 0000
P10.35
0x0000~0XFFFF 0000
P05.01~
P05.09
selection
P17.27
Simple PLC and the current
stage of the multi-stage
speed
7.15 PID control
PID control is commonly used to control the procedure through the controlled procedure. Adjust the
output frequency by proportional, integral, differential operation with the dispersion of the target
signals to stabilize the value on the target. It is possible to apply to the flow, pressure and
temperature control. Figure of basic control is as below:
Simple illustration of the PID control operation and adjustment:
Proportional adjustment (Kp): when there is an error between the feedback and the reference, a
proportional adjustment will be output. If the error is constant, the adjustment will be constant, too.
Proportional adjustment can respond to the feedback change quickly, but it can not realize non-fault

200
control. The gain will increase with the adjustment speed, but too much gain may cause vibration. The
adjustment method is: set a long integration time and derivation time to 0 first. Secondly make the
system run by proportional adjustment and change the reference. And then watch the error of the
feedback signal and the reference. If the static error is available (for example, increasing the
reference, the feedback will be less than the reference after a stable system), continue to increase the
gain, vice versa. Repeat the action until the static error achieves a little value.
Integration time (Ti): the output adjustment will accumulate if there is an error between the feedback
and the reference. The adjustment will keep on increasing until the error disappears. If the error is
existent all the time, the integration adjustor can cancel the static error effectively. Vibration may
occur as a result of unstable system caused by repeated over-adjustment if the integration adjustor is
too strong. The features of this kind of vibration are: the fluctuating feedback signal (around the
reference) and increasing traverse range will cause vibration. Adjust the integration time parameter
from a big value to a little one to change the integration time and monitor the result until a stable
system speed is available.
Derivation time (Td): when the error between the feedback and the reference, a proportional
adjustment will be output. The adjustment only depends on the direction and value of the error
change other than the error itself. The derivation adjustment controls the change of feedback signals
according to the changing trend when it fluctuates. Because the derivation may enlarge the
interference to the system, especially the frequent-changing interference, please use it carefully.
When P00.06, P00. 07=7 or P04.27=6, the running mode of the inverter is procedure PID control.
7.15.1 General steps of PID parameters setting:
a Ensure the gain P
When ensure the gain P, firstly cancel the PID integration and derivation (set Ti=0 and Td=0, see
the PID parameter setting for detailed information) to make proportional adjustment is the only
method to PID. Set the input as 60%~70% of the permitted Max. Value and increase gain P from 0
until the system vibration occurs, vice versa, and record the PID value and set it to 60%~70% of
the current value. Then the gain P commission is finished.
b Ensure the integration time
After ensuring the gain P, set an original value of a bigger integration time and decrease it until the
system vibration occurs, vice versa, until the system vibration disappear. Record the Ti and set the
integration time to 150%~180% of the current value. Then integration time commission is finished.
c Ensure the derivation time
Generally, it is not necessary to set Td which is 0.
If it needs to be set, set it to 30% of the value without vibration via the same method with P and Ti.

201
d Commission the system with and without load and then adjust the PID parameter until it is
available.
7.15.2 PID inching
After setting the PID control parameters, inching is possible by following means:
Control the overshoot
Shorten the derivation time and prolong the integration time when overshoot occurs.
Achieve the stable state as soon as possible
Shorten the integration time (Ti) and prolong the derivation time (Td) even the overshoot occurs,
but the control should be stable as soon as possible.
Control long vibration
If the vibration periods are longer than the set value of integration time (Ti), it is necessary to
prolong the integration time (Ti) to control the vibration for the strong integration.
Control short vibration
Short vibration period and the same set value with the derivation time (Td) mean that the derivation
time is strong. Shortening the derivation time (Td) can control the vibration. When setting the
derivation time as 0.00(ire no derivation control) is useless to control the vibration, decrease the
gain.

202
Function
code
Default
value
P09.00
PID given source
selection
0:Keypad digital given(P09.01)
3:Analog channel AI3 set
4:Hhigh speed pulse HDI set
5:Multi-stage speed set
6:MODBUS communication set
7:PROFIBUS communication set
8:Ethernet communication set
9:CAN communication set
0
P09.01
Keypad pre-setting PID
given
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
P09.02
PID feedback source
Selection
3:High speed HDI feedback
4:MODBUS communication feedback
5:PROFIBUS communication feedback
6:Ethernet communication feedback
7:CAN communication feedback
0
P09.03
PID output feature
selection
0:PID output is positive
1:PID output is negative
0
P09.04 Proportional gain (Kp) 0.00~100.00 1.00
P09.05 Interval time(Ti) 0.01~10.00s 0.10s
P09.06 Differential time(Td) 0.00~10.00s 0.00s
P09.07 Sampling cycle(T) 0.00~100.00s 0.10s

203
Function
code
Default
value
P09.08 PID control deviation limit 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
P09.09 Output upper limit of PID
P09.10~100.0% (Max. Frequency or the
Max. Voltage)
100.0%
P09.10 Output lower limit of PID
-100.0%~P09.09 (Max. Frequency or the
Max. Voltage)
0.0%
P09.11
Feedback offline detection
value
0.0~100.0%
0.0%
P09.12
Feedback offline detection
time
0.0~3600.0s
1.0s
P09.13 PID adjustment selection
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0:Keep the integral adjustment ON while
the frequency achieves upper or lower
limit.
1:Stop the integral adjustment while the
frequency achieves the upper or lower
limit
LED tens:
0:The same with the setting direction
1:Opposite to the setting direction
0x00
P17.00 Set frequency 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 0.00Hz
P17.23 PID given value -100.0~100.0% 0.0%
P17.24 PID response value -100.0~100.0% 0.0%
7.16 Traverse running
Traverse is applied in some industries such as textile, chemical fiber and cases where traverse and
convolution is required. The working flowchart is as below:

204
Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters
Default
value
P00.03
Max. output
frequency
P00.03~400.00Hz 50.00Hz
P00.06
A frequency
command
selection
setting(reserved)
11:CAN communication setting(reserved)
0
P00.11 ACC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
modul
e
P00.12 DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s
Depend
on
modul
e

205
Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters
Default
value
P05.01~P05.09
Digital input
function
selection
26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current
frequency)
27:Traverse reset(return to the center
frequency)
P08.15 Traverse range 0.0~100.0%(relative to the set frequency) 0.0%
P08.16
Sudden jumping
frequency
range
0.0~50.0%(relative to the traverse range) 0.0%
P08.17
Traverse boost
time
0.1~3600.0s 5.0s
P08.18
Traverse
declining time
0.1~3600.0s 5.0s
7.17 Pulse counter
Goodrive300 series inverters support pulse counter which can input counting pulse through HDI
terminal. When the actual length is longer than or equal to the set length, the digital output terminal
can output length arrival pulse signal and the corresponding length will be cleared automatically.

206
Function
code
Default
value
0
P05.40
input function
selection
0:Frequency setting input
1:Counter input
2:Length counting input
0
P05.01~
P05.09
selection
28:Counter reset
31:Counter trigger
P06.01~
P06.04
Digital output function
selection
P08.25 Setting counting value P08.26~65535 0
P08.26 Given counting value 0~P08.25 0
P17.18 Counting value 0~65535 0
7.18 Fixed-length control
Goodrive300 series inverters support fixed-length control function which can input length counting
pulse through HDI, and then count the actual length according to the internal counting formula. If
the actual length is longer than or equal to the set length, the digital output terminal can output the
length arrival pulse signal of 200ms and the corresponding length will be cleared automatically.
Note: the length arrival belongs to pulse output and the lasting time is 200ms.
Function
code
Default
value
0
P05.40
input function
0:Frequency setting input
1:Counter input
0

207
Function
code
Default
value
selection 2:Length counting input
P05.01~
P05.09
selection
32: Length reset
P06.01~
P06.04
Digital output function
selection
20: Length arrival
P08.19 Set length 0~65535m 0
P08.20 Actual length 0~65535m 0
P08.21 Pulse number per
revolution
1~10000 1
P08.22 Axis perimeter 0.01~100.00cm 10.00cm
P08.23 Length times 0.001~10.000 1.000
P08.24 Length correcting
coefficient
0.001~1.000 1.000
P17.17 Length 0~65535 0
7.19 Fault procedure
Goodrive300 series inverters provide sufficient fault procedure information for the convenience of
user’s application.

208
Function
code
Default
value
P07.27 Current fault type
0:No fault
1:IGBT U phase protection(OUt1)
2:IGBT V phase protection(OUt2)
3:IGBT W phase protection(OUt3)
4:OC1
5:OC2
6:OC3
7:OV1
8:OV2
9:OV3
10:UV
11:Motor overload(OL1)
12:The inverter overload(OL2)
13:Input side phase loss(SPI)
14:Output side phase loss(SPO)
15:Overheating of the rectifier
module(OH1)
16:Overheating fault of the inverter
module(OH2)
17:External fault(EF)
18:485 communication fault(CE)
19:Current detection fault(ItE)
20:Motor antotune fault(tE)
21:EEPROM operation fault(EEP)
22:PID response offline fault(PIDE)
23:Braking unit fault(bCE)
24:Running time arrival(END)
25:Electrical overload(OL3)
26:Panel communication fault(PCE)
27:Parameter uploading fault (UPE)
28:Parameter downloading fault(DNE)
29:Profibus communication fault(E-DP)
0

209
Function
code
Default
value
30:Ethernet communication fault(E-NET)
31:CAN communication fault(E-CAN)
34:Speed deviation fault(dEu)
35:Maladjustment(STo)
P07.28 Previous fault type
P07.29 Previous 2 fault type
P07.33
Current fault running
frequency
0.00Hz
P07.34
Ramp given frequency at
current fault
0.00Hz
P07.35
Output voltage at the
current fault
0V
P07.36
Current fault output
current
0.0A
P07.37 Current fault bus voltage 0.0V
P07.38
The Max. temperature at
Current fault
0.0℃
P07.39
Input terminals state at the
current fault
0
P07.40
the current fault
0
P07.41
Previous fault running
frequency
0.00Hz
P07.42
Ramp reference
frequency at previous fault
0.00Hz
P07.43 Output voltage at the 0V

210
Function
code
Default
value
previous fault
P07.44
Output current at the
previous fault
0.0A
P07.45
Bus voltage at the
previous fault
0.0V
P07.46
the previous fault
0.0℃
P07.47
Input terminals state at the
previous fault
0
P07.48
the previous fault
0
P07.49
Previous 2 fault running
frequency
0.00Hz
P07.50
Ramp given frequency at
the previous 2 fault
0.00Hz
P07.51
Output voltage at the
previous 2 fault
0V
P07.52
Output current at the
previous 2 fault
0.0A
P07.53
Bus voltage at the
previous 2 fault
0.0V
P07.54
previous 2 fault
0.0℃
P07.55
Input terminals state at
previous 2 fault
0
P07.56
previous 2 fault
0

Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking
211
Fault tracking 8
This chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and fault
messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
²Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the inverter. Read the
safety instructions in chapter Safety precautions before working on the
inverter.
8.2 Alarm and fault indications
Fault is indicated by LEDs. See Operation Procedure. When TRIP light is on, an alarm or
fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal inverter state. Using the information
given in this chapter, most alarm and fault cause can be identified and corrected. If not,
contact with the INVT office.
8.3 How to reset
The inverter can be reset by pressing the keypad key STOP/RST, through digital input, or by
switching the power light. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.
8.4 Fault history
Function codes P07.25~P07.30 store 6 recent faults. Function codes P07.31~P07.38,
P07.39~P7.46, P07.47~P07.54 show drive operation data when the latest 3 faults occurrs.
8.5 Fault instruction and solution
Do as the following after the inverter fault:
1. Check to ensure there is nothing wrong with the kepad. If not, please contact with the local
INVT office.
2. If there is nothing wrong, please check P07 and ensure the corresponding recorded fault
parameters to confirm the real state when the current fault occurs by all parameters.
3. See the following table for detailed solution and check the corresponding abnormal state.
4. Eliminate the fault and ask for relative help.
5. Check to eliminate the fault and carry out fault reset to run the inverter.

212
Fault code Fault type Possible cause What to do
OUt1 IGBT Ph-U fault 1. The acceleration is too
fast.
2. IGBT module fault.
3.The connection of the
driving wires is not good,
4. Grounding is not properly.
1. Increase Acc time.
2. Change the power unit.
3. Check the driving wires.
4. Inspect external
equipment and eliminate
interference.
OUt2 IGBT Ph-V fault
OUt3 IGBT Ph-W fault
OC1
Over-current when
acceleration
1. The acceleration or
deceleration is too fast.
2. The voltage of the grid is
too low.
3. The power of the inverter
is too low.
4. The load transients or is
abnormal.
5. The grounding is short
circuited or the output is
phase loss.
6. There is strong external
interference.
1. Increase the ACC time
2. Check the input power
3. Select the inverter with a
larger power
4. Check if the load is short
circuited (the grounding
short circuited or the wire
short circuited) or the
rotation is not smooth.
5. Check the output
configuration.
6. Check if there is strong
interference.
OC2
Over-current when
deceleration
OC3
Over-current when
constant speed
running
OV1
Over-voltage
when acceleration
1. The input voltage is
abnormal.
2. There is large energy
feedback.
1. Check the input power
2. Check if the DEC time of
the load is too short or the
inverter starts during the
rotation of the motor or it
needs to increase the
energy consumption
components.
OV2
Over-voltage
when deceleration
OV3
Over-voltage
when constant
speed running
UV
DC bus
Under-voltage
The voltage of the power
supply is too low.
Check the input power of
the supply line

213
OL1 Motor overload
1. The voltage of the power
supply is too low.
2. The motor setting rated
current is incorrect.
3. The motor stall or load
transients is too strong.
1. Check the power of the
supply line
2. Reset the rated current of
the motor
3. Check the load and adjust
the torque lift
OL2 Inverter overload
1. The acceleration is too
fast
2. Reset the rotating motor
3. The voltage of the power
supply is too low.
4. The load is too heavy.
5. Close loop vector control,
reverse direction of the code
panel and long low-speed
operation
1. Increase the ACC time
2. Avoid the restarting after
stopping.
3. Check the power of the
supply line
4. Select an inverter with
bigger power.
5. Select a proper motor.
OL3 Electrical overload
The inverter will report
overload pre-alarm
according to the set value.
Check the load and the
overload pre-alarm point.
SPI Input phase loss
Phase loss or fluctuation of
input R,S,T
1. Check input power
2. Check installation
distribution
SPO Output phase loss
U,V,W phase loss input(or
serious asymmetrical three
phase of the load)
1. Check the output
distribution
2. Check the motor and
cable
OH1 Rectify overheat
1. Air duct jam or fan
damage
2. Ambient temperature is
too high.
1. Refer to the overcurrent
solution
2. Redistribute
dredge the wind channel or

214
OH2 IGBT overheat
3. The time of overload
running is too long.
change the fan
3. Low the ambient
temperature
4. Check and reconnect
5. Change the power
6. Change the power unit
7. Change the main control
panel
EF External fault
SI external fault input
terminals action
Check the external device
input
CE
Communication
error
1. The baud rate setting is
incorrect.
2. Fault occurs to the
communication wiring.
3. The communication
address is wrong.
4. There is strong
interference to the
communication.
1. Set proper baud rate
2. Check the communication
connection distribution
3. Set proper
communication address.
4. Chang or replace the
connection distribution or
improve the
anti-interference capability.
ItE
Current detection
fault
1. The connection of the
control board is not good
2. Assistant power is bad
3. Hoare components is
broken
4. The modifying circuit is
abnormal.
1. Check the connector and
repatch
2. Change the Hoare
panel

215
tE Autotuning fault
1. The motor capacity does
not comply with the inverter
capability
2. The rated parameter of
the motor does not set
correctly.
3. The offset between the
parameters from autotune
and the standard parameter
is huge
4. Autotune overtime
1. Change the inverter mode
2. Set the ratedparameter
according to the motor
name plate
3. Empty the motor load and
reindentify
4. Check the motor
connection and set the
parameter.
5. Check if the upper limit
frequency is above 2/3 of
the rated frequency.
EEP EEPROM fault
1. Error of controlling the
write and read of the
parameters
2. Damage to EEPROM
1. Press STOP/RST to reset
panel
PIDE PID feedback fault
1. PID feedback offline
2. PID feedback source
disappear
1. Check the PID feedback
signal
2. Check the PID feedback
source
bCE Braking unit fault
1. Braking circuit fault or
damage to the braking pipes
2. The external braking
resistor is not sufficient
1. Check the braking unit
and , change new braking
pipe
2. Increase the braking
resistor
ETH1
Grounding
shortcut fault 1
1. The output of the inverter
is short circuited with the
ground.
2. There is fault in the
current detection circuit.
1. Check if the connection of
the motor is normal or not
2. Change the Hoare
panel

216
ETH2
Grounding
shortcut fault 2
1. The output of the inverter
is short circuited with the
ground.
2. There is fault in the
current detection circuit.
1. Check if the connection of
the motor is normal or not
2. Change the Hoare
panel
dEu
Velocity deviation
fault
The load is too heavy or
stalled.
1. Check the load and
ensure it is normal. Increase
the detection time.
2. Check whether the
control parameters are
normal.
STo
Maladjustment
fault
1. The control parameters of
the synchronous motors not
set properly.
2. The autoturn parameter is
not right.
3. The inverter is not
connected to the motor.
1. Check the load and
ensure it is normal.
2. Check whether the
control parameter is set
properly or not.
3. Increase the
maladjustment detection
time.
END
Time reach of
factory setting
The actual running time of
the inverter is above the
internal setting running time.
Ask for the supplier and
adjust the setting running
time.
PCE
Keypad
communication
fault
keypad wires is not good or
broken.
2. The keypad wire is too
long and affected by strong
interference.
3. There is circuit fault on
the communication of the
keypad and main board.
1. Check the keypad wires
and ensure whether there is
mistake.
2. Check the environment
and avoid the interference
source.
3. Change the hardware and
ask for service.

217
DNE
Parameters
downloading fault
keypad wires is not good or
broken.
2. The keypad wire is too
long and affected by strong
interference.
3. There is mistake on the
data storage of the keypad.
1. Check the keypad wires
and ensure whether there is
mistake.
2. Change the hardware and
ask for service.
3. Repack-up the data in the
keypad.
LL
Electronic
underload fault
The inverter will report the
underload pre-alarm
according to the set value.
Check the load and the
underload pre-alarm point.
E-DP
Profibus
communication
fault
1. Communication address
is not correct.
2. Corresponding resistor is
not dialed
3. The files of main stop
GSD does not set sound
Check related setting
E-NET
Ethernet
communication
fault
4. The Ethernet address is
not set right.
5. The Ethernet
communication is not
selected to right.
6. The ambient interference
is too strong.
1. Check the relative setting.
Check the communication
method selection.
2. Check the environment
and avoid the interference.
E-CAN
CAN
communication
fault
1. The connection is not
sound
2. Corresponding resistor is
not dialed
3. The communication is
uneven
1. Check the connection
2. Draw out the correspond
resistor
3. Set the same baud rate

218
8.6 Common fault analysis
8.6.1 The motor does not work

219
8.6.2 Motor vibration
Motor vibration or
abnormal noise
Check the motor parameter
or motor type is right or not
If the inverter fault, please
contact with our comapany
Check if there is abnormal
to the load
Check if there is abnormal
vibration to the given
frequency
Check the speed loop and
current is right or not
It id vector control or not
Perform parameter
autotune or not
Please set right
motor type and
parameters
Perform right
parameter autotune
Set right parameter
If set right V/F vibration parameter
or not
Set right parameter
Check the given
frequency
Check the load
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

220
8.6.3 Overvoltage
OV fault
Check if the voltage range is in
the standard one or not ?
Check if the ACC/DEC
time is too short
Check if the load
motor is in abnormal
reverse running
Ensure the power supply
meets the need
Check If UVW is short circuited to to
the earth and the configuration of
the output side is right or not?
Settle the short circuit
and confabulate rightly
Shortening the
ACC/DEC time
Check the load and
adjust
If the it is the inverter
fault, please contact with
our company
Check if shortening the
ACC/DEC time is allowed
Check if it
needs to use
the options
Add braking optionds
Adjust the braking
options and the resistor
Y
es
N
o
Y
es
N
o
Y
es
N
o
Y
es
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
es
Y
es
8.6.4 Undervoltage fault

221
8.6.5 Abnormal heating of the motor
Check if there is
abnormal heat to the
motor
Set right
motor
parameters
Check if it needs to carry
out parameter autotune
Parameter
autotune
Check if the inverter runs at low
speed all the time
Select right
motor
Low the load
Change the
motor
Set proper
carrier
frequency
Add output
filter
our company
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Check if the parameter is
right or not
Check if it is frequency-
invertering motor
Check if the load is too
heavy
Check if the 3-phase
motor is balance
Check if the carrier
frequency is too low
Check if the motor wire
is too long

222
8.6.6 Overheat of the inverter
8.6.7 Speed loss during the acceleration of the motor
Speed loss occurs to the
inverter during ACC
Check if the ACC time
is too short
fault or interference,
please contact with our
company
Overcurrent
fault or interference,
please contact with our
company
Check if it performs
parameter autotune
Modify the torque boost
Check if the torque
boost is too high
Check if the motor is
special
Reduce the inertia of the
load and increase the
capacity of the inverter
Check if it is V/F
control
Contact with our
company
Check if the load
torque is too big
Thicken the motor cables and shorten
the configuration distance and adjust the
voltage of the reactor
Check if the load and
inertia is too big
Increase the ACC time
Check if the voltage between the
terminals is among the range
Reduce the torque of the
load and increase the
capacity of the inverter
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o

223
8.6.8 Overcurrent
our company
Set right
V/F vibration control
parameters
Adjust the V/F curve
Check if there is
abnormal vibration to
the motor
Decrease the torque
boost
Check if the multi-dots
V/F curve is set rightly
our company
Check if the torque
boost is too big
Set right parameters of
current loop and speed
loop
Clear the interference
source
Check if it is V/F
control
Adjust the ACC/DEC
time
Check if there is
interference source
Parameters autotune
Check if the ACC/DEC
time is too short
Set right motor type and
parameters
Check if it needs
parameters autotune
Change the motor
Check if the motor is
short circuited to the
earth
Settle the short circuit
problem and configure
the motor cables rightly
Overcurrent
Check if the motor type and
parameters are right
Check if the parameter of current
loop and speed loop are right
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
N
o
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Y
e
s
N
o
Reduce the load and
increase the capacity of
the inverter
Check if the load is too
heavy
Check if UVW is short circuited to
the earth
Remove the motor cable and
ensure if there is connected with the
earth.

Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
224
Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9
9.1 What this chapter contains.
The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions of the inverter.
9.2 Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the inverter requires very little maintenance. The
table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by INVT.
Checking part Checking item
Checking
method
Criterion
Ambient environment
Check the ambient
temperature, humidity
and vibration and ensure
there is no dust, gas, oil
fog and water drop.
Visual
examination
and instrument
test
Conforming to
the manual
Ensure there are no tools
or other foreign or
dangerous objects
Visual
examination
There are no
tools or
dangerous
objects.
Voltage
Ensure the main circuit
and control circuit are
normal.
Measurement by
millimeter
Conforming to
the manual
Keypad
Ensure the display is
clear enough
Visual
examination
The characters
are displayed
normally.
Ensure the characters
are displayed totally
Visual
examination
Conforming to
the manual
Main
circuit
For public use
Ensure the screws are
tightened securility
Tighten up NA
Ensure there is no
distortion, crackles,
damage or
color-changing caused by
Visual
examination
NA

225
Checking
method
Criterion
overheating and aging to
the machine and
insulator.
Ensure there is no dust
and dirtiness
Visual
examination
NA
Note: if the color
of the copper
blocks change, it
does not mean
that there is
something
wrong with the
features.
The lead of the
conductors
Ensure that there is no
distortion or
color-changing of the
conductors caused by
overheating.
Visual
examination
NA
Ensure that there are no
crackles or
color-changing of the
protective layers.
Visual
examination
NA
Terminals seat
damage
Visual
examination
NA
Filter capacitors
weeping, color-changing,
crackles and cassis
expansion.
Visual
examination
NA
Ensure the safety valve is
in the right place.
Estimate the
usage time
according to the
maintenance or
NA

226
Checking
method
Criterion
measure the
static capacity.
If necessary, measure the
static capacity.
Measure the
capacity by
instruments.
The static
capacity is
above or equal
to the original
value *0.85.
Resistors
Ensure whether there is
replacement and splitting
caused by overheating.
Smelling and
visual
examination
NA
offline.
Visual
examination or
remove one
ending to
coagulate or
measure with
multimeters
The resistors are
in ±10% of the
standard value.
Transformers and
reactors
Ensure there is no
abnormal vibration, noise
and smelling,
Hearing,
smelling and
visual
examination
NA
Electromagnetism
contactors and
relays
vibration noise in the
workrooms.
Hearing
NA
Ensure the contactor is
good enough.
Visual
examination
NA
Control
circuit
PCB and plugs
Ensure there is no loose
screws and contactors.
Fasten up
NA
Ensure there is no
smelling and
color-changing.
Smelling and
visual
examination
NA

227
Checking
method
Criterion
Ensure there are no
crackles, damage
distortion and rust.
Visual
examination
NA
Ensure there is no
weeping and distortion to
the capacitors.
Visual
examination or
estimate the
usage time
according to the
maintenance
information
NA
Cooling
system
Cooling fan
Estimate whether there is
abnormal noise and
vibration.
Hearing and
Visual
examination or
rotate with hand
Stable rotation
Estimate there is no
losses screw.
Tighten up
NA
Ensure there is no
color-changing caused by
overheating.
Visual
examination or
estimate the
usage time
according to the
maintenance
information
NA
Ventilating duct
stuff or foreign objection
in the cooling fan, air
vent.
Visual
examination
NA
Consult the local INVT Service representative for more details on the maintenance. Visit the
official website of INVT: http://www.invt.com.cn and select Inverter Services – Maintenance
and Field Services.

228
9.3 Cooling fan
The inverter’s cooling fan has a minimum life span of 25,000 operating hours. The actual life
span depends on the inverter usage and ambient temperature.
The operating hours can be found through P07.15 (accumulative hours of the inverter).
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the inverter is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms appear. Replacement fans are available from INVT.
Replacing the cooling fan
²Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety Precautions.
Ignoring the instructions would cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the inverter and disconnect it from the AC power source and wait for at least the time
designated on the inverter.
2. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder
slightly upward from its front edge.
3. Free the fan cable from the clip.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Remove the fan holder from the hinges.
6. Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order.
7. Restore power.
9.4 Capacitors
9.4.1 Reforming the capacitors
The DC bus capacitors must be reformed according to the operation instruction if the
inverter has been stored for a long time. The storing time is counted form the producing date
other than the delivery data which has been marked in the serial number of the inverter.
Time Operational principle
Storing time less than 1
year
Operation without charging
Storing time 1-2 years Connect with the power for 1 hour before first ON command
Storing time 2-3 years
Use power surge to charge for the inverter
• Add 25% rated voltage for 30 minutes

229
Time Operational principle
Storing time more than 3
years
Use power surge to charge for the inverter
• Add 25% rated voltage for 2 hours
The method of using power surge to charge for the inverter:
The right selection of Power surge depends on the supply power of the inverter. Single
phase 220V AC/2A power surge applied to the inverter with single/three-phase 220V AC as
its input voltage. The inverter with single/three-phase 220V AC as its input voltage can apply
Single phase 220V AC/2A power surge. All DC bus capacitors charge at the same time
because there is one rectifier.
High-voltage inverter needs enough voltage (for example, 400V) during charging. The small
capacitor power (2A is enough) can be used because the capacitor nearly does not need
current when charging.
The operation method of inverter charging through resistors (LEDs):
The charging time is at least 60 minutes if charge the DC bus capacitor directly through
supply power. This operation is available on normal temperature and no-load condition and
the resistor should be serially connected in the 3-phase circuits of the power supply:
400V driven device: 1k/100W resistor. LED of 100W can be used when the power voltage is
no more than 400V. But if used, the light may be off or weak during charging.
400V charging illustration of the driven device

230
9.4.2 Change electrolytic capacitors
Ignoring the instructions may cause physical injury or death, or
Change electrolytic capacitors if the working hours of electrolytic capacitors in the inverter
are above 35000. Please contact with the local INVT offices or diall our national service
hotline (400-700-9997) for detailed operation.
9.5 Power cable
Ignoring the instructions may cause physical injury or death, or
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for at least the time designated
on the inverter.
2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections.
3. Restore power.

Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol
231
Communication protocol 10
This chapter describes the communication protocol of Goodrive300 series inverters.
The Goodrive300 series inverters provide RS485 communication interface. It adopts
international standard ModBus communication protocol to perform master-slave
communication. The user can realize centralized control through PC/PLC, upper control PC,
etc. (set the control command, running frequency of the inverter, modify relevant function
codes, monitor and control the operating state and fault information of the inverter and so on)
to adapt specific application requirements.
10.2 Brief instruction to Modbus protocol
Modbus protocol is a software protocol and common language which is applied in the
electrical controller. With this protocol, the controller can communicate with other devices via
network (the channel of signal transmission or the physical layer, such as RS485). And with
this industrial standard, the controlling devices of different manufacturers can be connected
to an industrial network for the convenient of being monitored.
There are two transmission modes for Modbus protocol: ASCII mode and RTU (Remote
Terminal Units) mode. On one Modbus network, all devices should select same transmission
mode and their basic parameters, such as baud rate, digital bit, check bit, and stopping bit
should have no difference.
Modbus network is a controlling network with single-master and multiple slaves, which
means that there is only one device performs as the master and the others are the slaves on
one Modbus network. The master means the device which has active talking right to sent
message to Modbus network for the controlling and inquiring to other devices. The slave
means the passive device which sends data message to the Modbus network only after
receiving the controlling or inquiring message (command) form the master (response). After
the master sends message, there is a period of time left for the controlled or inquired slaves
to response, which ensure there is only one slave sends message to the master at a time for
the avoidance of singles impact.
Generally, the user can set PC, PLC, IPC and HMI as the masters to realize central control.
Setting certain device as the master is a promise other than setting by a bottom or a switch
or the device has a special message format. For example, when the upper monitor is

232
running, if the operator clicks sending command bottom, the upper monitor can send
command message actively even it can not receive the message form other devices. In this
case, the upper monitor is the master. And if the designer makes the inverter send the data
only after receiving the command, then the inverter is the slave.
The master can communicate with any single slave or with all slaves. For the single-visiting
command, the slave should feedback a response message; for the broadcasting message
from the master, the slave does not need to feedback the response message.
10.3 Application of the inverter
The Modbus protocol of the inverter is RTU mode and the physical layer is 2-wire RS485.
10.3.1 2-wire RS485
The interface of 2-wire RS485 works on semiduplex and its data signal applies differential
transmission which is called balance transmission, too. It uses twisted pairs, one of which is
defined as A (+) and the other is defined as B (-). Generally, if the positive electrical level
between sending drive A and B is among +2~+6V, it is logic“1”,if the electrical level is among
-2V~-6V, it is logic“0”.
485+ on the terminal board corresponds to A and 485- to B.
Communication baud rate means the binary bit number in one second. The unit is bit/s (bps).
The higher the baud rate is, the quicker the transmission speed is and the weaker the
anti-interference is. If the twisted pairs of 0.56mm（24AWG）is applied as the communication
cables, the Max. Transmission distance is as below:
Baud rate Max. transmission
distance
Baud rate Max. transmission
distance
2400BPS 1800m 9600BPS 800m
4800BPS 1200m 19200BPS 600m
It is recommended to use shield cables and make the shield layer as the grounding wires
during RS485 remote communication.
In the cases with less devices and shorter distance, it is recommended to use 120Ω terminal
resistor as the performance will be weakened if the distance increase even though the
network can perform well without load resistor.
10.3.2.1 Single application
Figure 1 is the site Modbus connection figure of single inverter and PC. Generally, the
computer does not have RS485 interface, the RS232 or USB interface of the computer
should be converted into RS485 by converter. Connect the A terminal of RS485 to the 485+

233
terminal of the inverter and B to the 485- terminal. It is recommended to use the shield
twisted pairs. When applying RS232-RS485 converter, if the RS232 interface of the
computer is connected to the RS232 interface of the converter, the wire length should be as
short as possible within the length of 15m. It is recommended to connect the RS232-RS485
converter to the computer directly. If using USB-RS485 converter, the wire should be as
short as possible, too.
Select a right interface to the upper monitor of the computer (select the interface of
RS232-RS485 converter, such as COM1) after the wiring and set the basic parameters such
as communication baud rate and digital check bit to the same as the inverter.
Figure 1 RS485 physical connection in single application
10.3.1.2 Multi-applicationIn the real multi-application, the chrysanthemum connection and
star connection are commonly used.
Chrysanthemum chain connection is required in the RS485 industrial fieldbus standards.
The two ends are connected to terminal resistors of 120Ω which is shown as figure 2. Figure
3 is the simply connection figure and figure 4 is the real application figure.
Fugure 2 Chrysanthemum connection

234
Figure 3 Chrysanthemum connection
Figure 4 Chrysanthemum connection applications
Figure 5 is the star connection. Terminal resistor should be connected to the two devices
which have the longest distance. (1# and 15#device)
Figure 5 star connection
It is recommended to use shield cables in multiple connection. The basic parameter of the
devices, such as baud rate and digital check bit in RS485 should be the same and there
should be no repeated address.
10.3.2 RTU mode
10.3.2.1 RTU communication frame format
If the controller is set to communicate by RTU mode in Modbus network every 8bit byte in
the message includes two 4Bit hex characters. Compared with ACSII mode, this mode can

235
send more data at the same baud rate.
Code system
· 1 start bit
· 7 or 8 digital bit, the minimum valid bit can be sent firstly. Every 8 bit frame includes two
hex characters (0...9, A...F)
· 1 even/odd check bit . If there is no checkout, the even/odd check bit is inexistent.
· 1 end bit (with checkout), 2 Bit(no checkout)
Error detection field
· CRC
The data format is illustrated as below:
11-bit character frame (BIT1~BIT8 are the digital bits)
Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7 BIT8
Check
bit
End bit
10-bit character frame (BIT1~BIT7 are the digital bits)
Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7
Check
bit
End bit
In one character frame, the digital bit takes effect. The start bit, check bit and end bit is used
to send the digital bit right to the other device. The digital bit, even/odd checkout and end bit
should be set as the same in real application.
The Modbus minimum idle time between frames should be no less than 3.5 bytes. The
network device is detecting, even during the interval time, the network bus. When the first
field (the address field) is received, the corresponding device decodes next transmitting
character. When the interval time is at least 3.5 byte, the message ends.
The whole message frame in RTU mode is a continuous transmitting flow. If there is an
interval time (more than 1.5 bytes) before the completion of the frame, the receiving device
will renew the uncompleted message and suppose the next byte as the address field of the
new message. As such, if the new message follows the previous one within the interval time
of 3.5 bytes, the receiving device will deal with it as the same with the previous message. If
these two phenomena all happen during the transmission, the CRC will generate a fault
message to respond to the sending devices.
The standard structure of RTU frame:
START T1-T2-T3-T4(transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
ADDR
Communication address: 0~247(decimal system)(0 is the broadcast
address)

236
CMD
03H:read slave parameters
06H:write slave parameters
DATA (N-1)
…
DATA (0)
The data of 2*N bytes are the main content of the communication as
well as the core of data exchanging
CRC CHK low bit
Detection value:CRC (16BIT）
CRC CHK high bit
END T1-T2-T3-T4(transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
10.3.2.1 RTU communication frame error checkout
Various factors (such as electromagnetic interference) may cause error in the data
transmission. For example, if the sending message is a logic “1”,A-B potential difference on
RS485 should be 6V, but in reality, it may be -6V because of electromagnetic interference,
and then the other devices take the sent message as logic“0”. If there is no error checkout,
the receiving devices will not find the message is wrong and they may give incorrect
response which cause serious result. So the checkout is essential to the message.
The theme of checkout is that: the sender calculate the sending data according to a fixed
formula, and then send the result with the message. When the receiver gets this message,
they will calculate anther result according to the same method and compare it with the
sending one. If two results are the same, the message is correct. If not, the message is
incorrect.
The error checkout of the frame can be divided into two parts: the bit checkout of the byte
and the whole data checkout of the frame (CRC check).
Bit checkout of the byte
The user can select different bit checkouts or non-checkout, which impacts the check bit
setting of each byte.
The definition of even checkout: add an even check bit before the data transmission to
illustrate the number of “1” in the data transmission is odd number or even number. When it is
even, the check byte is “0”, otherwise, the check byte is”1”. This method is used to stabilize
the parity of the data.
The definition of odd checkout: add an odd check bit before the data transmission to illustrate
the number of “1” in the data transmission is odd number or even number. When it is odd, the
check byte is “0”, otherwise, the check byte is”1”. This method is used to stabilize the parity
of the data.
For example, when transmitting “11001110”, there are five “1” in the data. If the even

237
checkout is applied, the even check bit is “1”; if the odd checkout is applied; the odd check bit
is “0”. The even and odd check bit is calculated on the check bit position of the frame. And
the receiving devices also carry out even and odd checkout. If the parity of the receiving data
is different from the setting value, there is an error in the communication.
CRC check
The checkout uses RTU frame format. The frame includes the frame error detection field
which is based on the CRC calculation method. The CRC field is two bytes, including 16
figure binary values. It is added into the frame after calculated by transmitting device. The
receiving device recalculates the CRC of the received frame and compares them with the
value in the received CRC field. If the two CRC values are different, there is an error in the
communication.
During CRC, 0*FFFF will be stored. And then, deal with the continuous 6-above bytes in the
frame and the value in the register. Only the 8Bit data in every character is effective to CRC,
while the start bit, the end and the odd and even check bit is ineffective.
The calculation of CRC applies the international standard CRC checkout principles. When
the user is editing CRC calculation, he can refer to the relative standard CRC calculation to
write the required CRC calculation program.
Here provided a simple function of CRC calculation for the reference (programmed with C
language):
unsigned int crc_cal_value(unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char data_length)
{
int i;
unsigned int crc_value=0xffff;
while(data_length--)
{ crc_value^=*data_value++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value&0x0001)crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
else crc_value=crc_value>>1;
} }
return(crc_value);
}
In ladder logic, CKSM calculated the CRC value according to the frame with the table inquiry.

238
The method is advanced with easy program and quick calculation speed. But the ROM
space the program occupied is huge. So use it with caution according to the program
required space.
10.4 RTU command code and communication data illustration
10.4.1 command code:03H
03H（correspond to binary 0000 0011）,read N words（Word）(the Max. continuous
reading is 16 words)
Command code 03H means that if the master read data form the inverter, the reading
number depends on the “data number” in the command code. The Max. continuous reading
number is 16 and the parameter address should be continuous. The byte length of every
data is 2 (one word). The following command format is illustrated by hex (a number with “H”
means hex) and one hex occupies one byte.
The command code is used to read the working stage of the inverter.
For example, read continuous 2 data content from0004H from the inverter with the address
of 01H (read the content of data address of 0004H and 0005H), the frame structure is as
below:
RTU master command message (from the master to the inverter)
START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
High bit of the start bit 00H
Low bit of the start bit 04H
High bit of data number 00H
Low bit of data number 02H
CRC low bit 85H
CRC high bit CAH
END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
T1-T2-T3-T4 between START and END is to provide at least the time of 3.5 bytes as the
leisure time and distinguish two messages for the avoidance of taking two messages as one
message.
ADDR = 01H means the command message is sent to the inverter with the address of 01H
and ADDR occupies one byte
CMD=03H means the command message is sent to read data form the inverter and CMD

239
occupies one byte
“Start address” means reading data form the address and it occupies 2 bytes with the fact
that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind.
“Data number” means the reading data number with the unit of word. If the “start address’ is
0004H and the “data number” is 0002H, the data of 0004H and 0005H will be read.
CRC occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the
behind.
RTU slave response message (from the inverter to the master)
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
Byte number 04H
Data high bit of address 0004H 13H
Data low bit of address 0004H 88H
Data high bit of address 0005H 00H
Data low bit of address 0005H 00H
CRC CHK low bit 7EH
CRC CHK high bit 9DH
The meaning of the response is that:
ADDR = 01H means the command message is sent to the inverter with the address of 01H
and ADDR occupies one byte
CMD=03H means the message is receiced from the inverter to the master for the response
of reading command and CMD occupies one byte
“Byte number” means all byte number from the byte(excluding the byte) to CRC
byte(excluding the byte). 04 means there are 4 byte of data from the “byte number” to “CRC
CHK low bit”, which are “digital address 0004H high bit”, “digital address 0004H low bit”,
“digital address 0005H high bit” and “digital address 0005H low bit”.
There are 2 bytes stored in one data with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low
bit is in the behind of the message, the data of data address 0004H is 1388H,and the data of
data address 0005H is 0000H.
CRC occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the
behind.

240
10.4.2 Command code:06H
06H(correspond to binary 0000 0110), write one word(Word)
The command means that the master write data to the inverter and one command can write
one data other than multiple dates. The effect is to change the working mode of the inverter.
For example, write 5000 (1388H) to 0004H from the inverter with the address of 02H, the
frame structure is as below:
RTU master command message (from the master to the inverter)
START
T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5
bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 06H
High bit of writing data address 00H
Low bit of writing data address 04H
data content 13H
data content 88H
CRC CHK low bit C5H
CRC CHK high bit 6EH
END
bytes)
RTU slave response message (from the inverter to the master)
START
bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 06H
High bit of writing data address 00H
Low bit of writing data address 04H
High bit of data content 13H
Low bit of data content 88H
CRC CHK low bit C5H
CRC CHK high bit 6EH
END
bytes)
Note: section 10.2 and 10.3 mainly describe the command format, and the detailed

241
application will be mentioned in 10.8 with examples.
10.4.3 Command code 08H for diagnosis
Meaning of sub-function codes
Sub-function Code Description
0000 Return to inquire information data
For example: The inquiry information string is same as the response information string when
the loop detection to address 01H of driver is carried out.
The RTU request command is:
ADDR 01H
CMD 08H
High byte of sub-function code 00H
Low byte of sub-function code 00H
High byte of data content 12H
Low byte of data content ABH
Low byte of CRC ADH
High byte of CRC 14H
The RTU response command is:
ADDR 01H
CMD 08H
High byte of sub-function code 00H
Low byte of sub-function code 00H
High byte of data content 12H
Low byte of data content ABH
Low byte of CRC ADH
High byte of CRC 14H
10.4.4 The definition of data address
The address definition of the communication data in this part is to control the running of the
inverter and get the state information and relative function parameters of the inverter.

242
10.4.4.1 The rules of parameter address of the function codes
The parameter address occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the
low bit is in the behind. The range of high and low byte are: high byte—00~ffH; low byte—
00~ffH. The high byte is the group number before the radix point of the function code and the
low byte is the number after the radix point. But both the high byte and the low byte should
be changed into hex. For example P05.05, the group number before the radix point of the
function code is 05, then the high bit of the parameter is 05, the number after the radix point
05, then the low bit of the parameter is 05, then t he function code address is 0505H and the
parameter address of P10.01 is 0A01H.
Note: PE group is the factory parameter which can not be read or changed. Some
parameters can not be changed when the inverter is in the running state and some
parameters can not be changed in any state. The setting range, unit and relative instructions
should be paid attention to when modifying the function code parameters.
Besides, EEPROM is stocked frequently, which may shorten the usage time of EEPROM.
For users, some functions are not necessary to be stocked on the communication mode.
The needs can be met on by changing the value in RAM. Changing the high bit of the
function code form 0 to 1 can also realize the function. For example, the function code
P00.07 is not stocked into EEPROM. Only by changing the value in RAM can set the
address to 8007H. This address can only be used in writing RAM other than reading. If it is
used to read, it is an invalid address.
10.4.1.2 The address instruction of other function in Modbus
The master can operate on the parameters of the inverter as well as control the inverter,
such as running or stopping and monitoring the working state of the inverter.
Below is the parameter list of other functions

243
Function
instruction
Address
definition
Data meaning instruction
R/W
characteristics
Communication
control command
2000H
0001H:forward running
W
0002H:reverse running
0003H:forward jogging
0004H:reverse jogging
0005H:stop
0006H:coast to stop (emergency stop)
0007H:fault reset
0008H:jogging stop
0009H:pre-exciting
The address of
the
communication n
setting value
2001H
Communication setting
frequency(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz))
W
2002H
PID given, range(0~1000, 1000 corresponds
to100.0% )
2003H
PID feedback, range(0~1000, 1000
corresponds to100.0% )
W
2004H
Torque setting value (-3000~3000, 1000
corresponds to the 100.0% of the rated current
of the motor)
W
2005H
The upper limit frequency setting during
forward rotation(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz))
W
2006H
The upper limit frequency setting during
reverse rotation(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz))
W
2007H
The upper limit torque of electromotion torque
(0~3000, 1000 corresponds to the 100.0% of
W
2008H
The upper limit torque of braking torque
W
2009H
Special control command word
Bit0~1:=00:motor 1 =01:motor 2
=10:motor 3 =11:motor 4
W

244
Function
instruction
Address
definition
R/W
characteristics
Bit2:=1 torque control =0:speed control
200AH
Virtual input terminal command , range:
0x000~0x1FF
W
200BH
Virtual input terminal command , range:
0x00~0x0F
W
200CH
Voltage setting value(special for V/F
separation)
the rated voltage of the motor)
W
200DH
AO output setting 1(-1000~1000, 1000
corresponds to 100.0%)
W
200EH
AO output setting 2(-1000~1000, 1000
corresponds to 100.0%)
W
SW 1 of the
inverter
2100H
R
0003H:stop
0004H:fault
0005H: POFF state
SW 1 of the
inverter
2101H
Bit0: =0:bus voltage is not established
=1:bus voltage is established
Bi1~2:=00:motor 1 =01:motor 2
=10:motor 3 =11:motor 4
Bit3: =0:asynchronous motor
=1:synchronous motor
Bit4:=0:pre-alarm without overload
=1:overload pre-alarm
Bit5:=0:the motor without exciting
=1:the motor with exciting
R
Fault code of the
inverter
2102H See the fault type instruction R
Identifying code 2103H Goodrive300-----0x0110 R

245
Function
instruction
Address
definition
R/W
characteristics
of the inverter
Factory barcode
1
6000H Range: 0000~FFFF W
Factory barcode
2
Factory barcode
3
Factory barcode
4
Factory barcode
5
Factory barcode
6
R/W characteristics means the function is with read and write characteristics. For example,
“communication control command” is writing chrematistics and control the inverter with
writing command (06H). R characteristic can only read other than write and W characteristic
can only write other than read.
Note: when operate on the inverter with the table above, it is necessary to enable some
parameters. For example, the operation of running and stopping, it is necessary to set
P00.01 to communication running command channel and set P00.02 to MODBUS
communication channel. And when operate on “PID given”, it is necessary to set P09.00 to
“MODBUS communication setting”.
The encoding rules for device codes (corresponds to identifying code 2103H of the inverter)
Code high
8bit
Meaning
Code low 8
position
Meaning
00 CHV
01 Vector inverter
02 Special for water supply
03 intermediate frequency 1500HZ
04 intermediate frequency 3000HZ
01 CHE
01 CHE100 Vector inverter
02 CHE100 intermediate frequency 1500HZ

246
Code high
8bit
Meaning
Code low 8
position
Meaning
10 Goodrive300 Vector inverter
02 CHF
01 General inverter CHF100
02 Enhanced general inverter CHF100A
Note: the code is consisted of 16 bit which is high 8 bits and low 8 bits. High 8 bits mean
the motor type series and low 8 bits mean the derived motor types of the series. For
example, 0110H means Goodrive300 vector inverters.
10.4.5 Fieldbus ratio values
The communication data is expressed by hex in actual application and there is no radix point
in hex. For example, 50.12Hz can not be expressed by hex so 50.12 can be magnified by
100 times into 5012, so hex 1394H can be used to express 50.12.
A non-integer can be timed by a multiple to get an integer and the integer can be called
fieldbus ratio values.
The fieldbus ratio values are refered to the radix point of the setting range or default value in
the function parameter list. If there are figures behind the radix point (n=1), then the fieldbus
ratio value m is10n
. Take the table as the example:
If there is one figure behind the radix point in the setting range or the default value, then the
fieldbus ratio value is 10. if the data received by the upper monitor is 50, then the
“hibernation restore delay time” is 5.0 (5.0=50÷10).
If Modbus communication is used to control the hibernation restore delay time as 5.0s.
Firstly, 5.0 can be magnified by 10 times to integer 50 (32H) and then this data can be sent.
After the inverter receives the command, it will change 50 into 5 according to the fieldbus
ratio value and then set the hibernation restore delay time as 5s.

247
Another example, after the upper monitor sends the command of reading the parameter of
hibernation restore delay time ,if the response message of the inverter is as following:
Because the parameter data is 0032H (50) and 50 divided by 10 is 5, then the hibernation
restore delay time is 5s.
10.4.6 Fault message response
There may be fault in the communication control. For example, some parameter can only be
read. If a writing message is sent, the inverter will return a fault response message.
The fault message is from the inverter to the master, its code and meaning is as below:
Code Name Meaning
01H
Illegal
command
The command from master can not be executed. The reason
maybe:
1. This command is only for new version and this version can not
realize.
2. Slave is in fault state and can not execute it.
02H
Illegal data
address.
Some of the operation addresses are invalid or not allowed to
access. Especially the combination of the register and the
transmitting bytes are invalid.
03H Illegal value
When there are invalid data in the message framed received by
slave.
Note: This error code does not indicate the data value to write
exceed the range, but indicate the message frame is an illegal
frame.
04H
Operation
failed
The parameter setting in parameter writing is invalid. For example,
the function input terminal can not be set repeatedly.
05H
Password
error
The password written to the password check address is not same
as the password set by P7.00.
06H
Data frame
error
In the frame message sent by the upper monitor, the length of the
digital frame is incorrect or the counting of CRC check bit in RTU is
different from the lower monitor.
07H Written not It only happen in write command, the reason maybe:

248
allowed. 1. The written data exceeds the parameter range.
2. The parameter should not be modified now.
3. The terminal has already been used.
08H
The parameter
can not be
changed
during running
The modified parameter in the writing of the upper monitor can not
be modified during running.
09H
Password
protection
When the upper monitor is writing or reading and the user
password is set without password unlocking, it will report that the
system is locked.
The slave uses functional code fields and fault addresses to indicate it is a normal response
or some error occurs (named as objection response). For normal responses, the slave
shows corresponding function codes, digital address or sub-function codes as the response.
For objection responses, the slave returns a code which equals the normal code, but the first
byte is logic 1.
For example: when the master sends a message to the slave, requiring it to read a group of
address data of the inverter function codes, there will be following function codes:
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex 03H)
For normal responses, the slave responds the same codes, while for objection responses, it
will return:
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex 83H)
Besides the function codes modification for the objection fault, the slave will respond a byte
of abnormal code which defines the error reason.
When the master receives the response for the objection, in a typical processing, it will send
the message again or modify the corresponding order.
For example, set the “running command channel” of the inverter (P00.01, parameter
address is 0001H) with the address of 01H to 03, the command is as following:
But the setting range of “running command channel” is 0~2, if it is set to 3, because the
number is beyond the range, the inverter will return fault response message as below:

249
Abnormal response code 86H means the abnormal response to writing command 06H; the
fault code is 04H. In the table above, its name is operation failed and its meaning is that the
parameter setting in parameter writing is invalid. For example, the function input terminal can
not be set repeatedly.
10.4.7 Example of writing and reading
Refer to 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 for the command format.
10.4.7.1 Example of reading command 03H
Read the state word 1 of the inverter with the address of 01H (refer to table 1). From the
table 1, the parameter address of the state word 1 of the inverter is 2100H.
The command sent to the inverter:
If the response message is as below:
The data content is 0003H. From the table 1, the inverter stops.
Watch “the current fault type” to “the previous 5 times fault type” of the inverter through
commands, the corresponding function code is P07.27~P07.32 and corresponding
parameter address is 071BH~0720H(there are 6 from 071BH).
The command sent to the inverter:
If the response message is as below:

250
See from the returned data, all fault types are 0023H (decimal 35) with the meaning of
maladjustment (STo).
10.4.7.2 Example of writing command 06H
Make the inverter with the address of 03H to run forward. See table 1, the address of
“communication control command” is 2000H and forward running is 0001. See the table
below.
The command sent by the master:
If the operation is success, the response may be as below (the same with the command sent
by the master):
Set the Max. Output frequency of the inverter with the address of 03H as100Hz.
See the figures behind the radix point, the fieldbus ratio value of the Max. output frequency
(P00.03) is 100. 100Hz timed by 100 is 10000 and the corresponding hex is 2710H.
The command sent by the master:

251
If the operation is successful, the response may be as below (the same with the command
sent by the master):
Note: the blank in the above command is for illustration. The blank can not be added in the
actual application unless the upper monitor can remove the blank by themselves.
Common communication fault
Common communication faults are: no response to the communication or the inverter
returns abnormal fault.
The possible reason for no response to the communication:
Selecting wrong serial interface, for example, if the converter is COM1, selecting COM2
during the communication
The baud rate, digital bit, end bit and check bit are not the same with the inverter + and - of
RS485 are connected in reverse.
The 485 wire cap on the terminal board of the inverter is not plug in. the wire cap in behind
the terminal arrangement.

Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A
252
Extension card Appendix A
A.1 What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the extension cards used in Goodrive300 series inverters.
A.2 Profibus extension card
(1) Profibus is an open international fieldbus standard that allows data exchange among
various types of automation components. It is widely used in manufacturing automation,
process automation and in other automation areas such as buildings, transportation, power,
providing an effective solution for the realization of comprehensive automation and
site-equipment intellectualization.
(2) Profibus is composed of three compatible components, Profibus-DP (Decentralized
Periphery, distributed peripherals), Profibus-PA (Process Automation), Profibus-FMS
(Fieldbus Message Specification). It is periodically exchange data with the inverter when
using master-slave way. PRNV Profibus-DP Adapter module only supports Profibus-DP
protocol.
(3) The physical transmission medium of bus is twisted-pair (in line with RS-485 standard),
two-wire cable or fiber optic cable. Baud rate is from 9.6Kbit/s to 12Mbit/s. The maximum
bus cable length is between 100 m and 1200 m, specific length depending on the selected
transmission rate (see chapter Technical Data). Up to 31 nodes can be connected to the
same Profibus network when repeaters aren’t used. But, if use repeaters, up to 127 nodes
can be connected to the same Profibus network segment (including repeaters and master
stations).
(4) In the process of Profibus communication, tokens are assigned among main stations and
master-slave transmission among master-slave stations. Supporting single-master or
multi-master system, stations-programmable logic controller (PLC)-choose nodes to
respond to the host instruction. Cycle master-from user data transmission and non-cyclic
master-master station can also send commands to multiple nodes in the form of broadcast.
In this case, the nodes do not need to send feedback signals to the host. In the Profibus
network, communication between nodes can not be allowed.
(5) Profibus protocol is described in detail in EN 50170 standard. To obtain more information
about Profibus, please refer to the above-mentioned EN 50170 standards.

253
A.2.1 Product naming rules
Fieldbus adapter naming rules, the product model:
Figure 11-1 Profibus-DP
A.2.2 CH-PA01 Profibus-DP Adapter Module
CH-PA01 Profibus-DP Adapter module is an optional device to inverter which makes inverter
connected to Profibus network. In Profibus network, inverter is a subsidiary device. The
following functions can be completed using CH-PA01 Profibus-DP Adapter module:
● Send control commands to inverter (start, stop, fault reset, etc.).
● Send speed or given torque signal to inverter.
● Read state and actual values from inverter.
● Modify inverter parameter.
Please refer to the description of function codes in Group P15 for the commands supported
by the inverter. Below is the structure diagram of the connection between the INVT inverter
and Profibus:

254
A.2.3 The appearance of CH-PA01 Profibus-DP adapter
Figure CH-PA01 Adapter Module Outline diagram
1. Interface to the panel 2. Bus connector 3. Rotation node address selection switches 4.
State display LEDs
CH-PA01 adapter External Dimensions Figure (Unit: mm)
A.2.4 CH-PA01 compatible motor type
CH-PA01 adapter is compatible with the following products:
● Goodrive300 series devices and all blasters supporting Profibus extension
● Host station supporting Profibus-DP protocol
A.2.5 Delivery list
The package of CH-PA01 Profibus-DP adapter contains:
● Profibus-DP adapter module, model CH-PA01
● Three copper columns and six bolts (M3x10)
● User’s manual
● One CD-ROM (GSD files)

255
Please contact with SHENZHEN INVT ELECTRIC CO., LTD or suppliers if there is
something missing. Notice will not be given for the reason of product upgrades.
A.2.6 Adapter installation
A.2.6.1 Adapter mechanical installation
1. Installation ambient
● Ambient temperature:0℃ ~ +40℃
● Relative humidity:5%~95%
● Other climate conditions: no drew, ice, rain, snow, hail air condition and the solar
radiation is below 700W/m2
,air pressure 70~106kPa
● Content of salt spray and corrosive gases :Pollution Level 2
● Dust and solid particles content: Pollution Level 2
● Vibration and shock: 5.9m/s2
(0.6g) on 9~ 200Hz sinusoidal vibration
2. Installation:
Fix the three copper columns on the location holes (H10, H11and H12) with three bolts. And
then fit CH-PA01 adapter on the slot marked J5 on the control panel. The signals of control
panel and CH-PA01 adapter module is transferred by J5 connector (34 frames).
3. Installation steps:
● Fix the three copper columns on the location holes with three screws.
● Insert the module into the defined location carefully and fix it on the copper column
with screw.
● Set the bus terminal switch of the module to the needed location.
4. Notes:
Disconnect the device from the power line before installation. Wait for at least three minutes
to let the capacitors discharge. Cut off dangerous voltage from external control circuit to the
unit output and input terminals.
Some electric components are sensitive to static charge. Do not touch the circuit board. If
you have to operate on it, please wear the grounding wrist belt.
A.2.6.2 Adapter electrical installation
1. Node selection
Node address is the only address of Profibus on the bus. The address which is among
00~99 is shown with two figures and is selected by the spinning switch on the module. The
left switch shows the first number and the right one show the second number.
Node address = 10 x the first digital value + the second digital value x 1

256
2. Bus terminals
There is a bus terminal in each heading and ending to avoid error during operation. The DIP
switch on RPBA-01PCB is used to connect the bus terminals which can avoid the signal
feedback from the bus cables. If the module is the first or last one in the internet, the bus
terminal should be set as ON. Please disconnect CH-PA01 terminals when the Profibus
D-sub connector with internal terminals is in use.
A.2.6.3 CH-PA01 adapter bus net connection
Bus communication interface
Transformation by double-shielded twisted pair copper cable is the most common way in
Profibus (conform to RS-485standard).
The basic characteristics of transformation technology:
● Net topology:Linear bus, there are bus resistor in two ends.
● Transforming speed: 9.6k bit/s~12M bit/s
● Medium: double-shielded twisted pair cables,the shield can be removed according
to the environment (EMC).
● Station number: There are 32 stations in each segment (without relays) as to 127
stations (with relays)
● Contact pin: 9 frames D pin, the connector contact pins are as below:,

257
Contact pin of the connector Instruction
1 - Unused
2 - Unused
3 B-Line Positive data(twisted pair cables 1)
4 RTS Sending requirement
5 GND_BUS Isolation ground
6 +5V BUS Isolated 5V DC power supply
7 - Unused
8 A-Line Negative data(twisted pair cables 2)
9 - Unused
Housing SHLD Profibus shielded cable
+5V and GND_BUS are used in the fieldbus terminals. Some devices, such as light
transceiver (RS485) may get external power supply form these pins.
RTS is used in some devices to determine the sending direction. Only A-Line wires, B-Line
wires and shield are used in the normal application.
It is recommended to apply the standard DB9 connector of SIEMENS. If the communication
baud rate is above 187.5kbps, please follow the connection rules of SIEMENS seriously.
Repeater
Up to 32 stations can be connected to each segment (master station or subsidiary stations),
the repeater have to be used when stations is more than 32. The repeaters in series are
generally no more than 3.
Note: There is no repeater station address.

258
A.2.6.4 Transmission rate and maximum distance
Maximum length of cable depends on the transmission rate. The Table below shows the
relationship between transmission rate and distance.
Transmission rate (kbps) A-wire (m) B-wire (m)
9.6 1200 1200
19.2 1200 1200
93.75 1200 1200
187.5 1000 600
500 400 200
1500 200 -----
12000 100 -----
Transmission line parameters:
Transmission rate (kbps) A-wire (m) B-wire (m)
Impedance (Ω) 135~165 100~130
Capacitance per unit length(pF/m) < 30 < 60
Loop Resistance (Ω/km) 110 --------
Core wire diameter (mm) 0.64 > 0.53
Line-core cross-section (mm2
) > 0.34 > 0.22
Besides shielding twisted-pair copper wires, Profibus can also use optical fiber for
transmission in an electromagnetic interference environment to increase the high-speed
transmission distance there are two kinds of fiber optical conductors, one is low-cost plastic
fiber conductor, used distance is less than 50 meters, the other is glass fiber conductor, and
used distance is less than 1 kM.
A.2.6.5 Profibus bus connection diagram

259
Above is "terminal" wiring diagram. Cable is a standard Profibus cable consisting of a twisted
pair and shielding layer. The shielded layer of Profibus cable on all nodes is directly
grounded. Users can choose the best grounding method according to the situation.
Note:
Make sure that signal lines do not twist when connecting all stations. Shielded cable should
be used when system runs under high electromagnetic interface environment, which can
improve electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
If using shielded braided wire and shielding foil, both ends should be connected to ground.
Using shielding area should be large enough to maintain a good conductivity. And data lines
must be separated from high-voltage.
Stub line segment should not be used when transmission rate more than 500K bit/s, The
plug is available on the market which connects directly to data input and output cable. Bus
plug connection can be on or off at any time without interruption of data communications of
other station.
A.2.7 System configuration
1. Master station and inverter should be configured so that the master station can
communicate with the module after correctly installing CH-PA01 Profibus-DP Adapter
module.
Each Profibus subsidiary station on the Profibus bus need to have "device description
document" named GSD file which used to describe the characteristics of Profibus-DP
devices. The software we provided for the user includes inverter related GSD files (device
data files) information, users can obtain type definition file (GSD) of master machines from
local INVT agent.
CH-PA01 configuration parameters

260
Parameter
Number
Parameter
Name
optional setting Factory setting
0 Module type Read only Profibus-DP
1 Node address 0~99 2
2 Baud rate setting
kbit/s
0:9.6
6
1:19.2
2:45.45
3:93.75
4:187.5
5:500
Mbit/s
6:1.5
7:3
8:6
9:9
10:12
3 PZD3 0~65535 0
4 PZD4 Ibid 0
… …… Ibid 0
10 PZD12 Ibid 0
2. Module type
This parameter shows communication module type detected by inverter; users can not
adjust this parameter. If this parameter is not defined, communication between the modules
and inverter can not be established.
3. Node address
In Profibus network, each device corresponds to a unique node address, you can use the
node address selection switch to define node address (switch isn’t at 0) and the parameter is
only used to display the node address.
If node address selection switch is 0, this parameter can define node address. The user can
not adjust the parameter by themselves and the parameter is only used to display the node
address.
4. GSD file
In Profibus network, each Profibus subsidiary station needs GSD file "device description
document" which used to describe the characteristics of Profibus-DP devices. GSD file

261
contains all defined parameters, including baud rate, information length, amount of
input/output data, meaning of diagnostic data.
A CD-ROM will be offered in which contains GSD file (extension name is .gsd) for fieldbus
adapter. Users can copy GSD file to relevant subdirectory of configuration tools, please refer
to relevant system configuration software instructions to know specific operations and
Profibus system configuration.
A.2.8 Profibus-DP communication
1. Profibus-DP
Profibus-DP is a distributed I/O system, which enables master machine to use a large
number of peripheral modules and field devices. Data transmission shows cycle: master
machine read input information from subsidiary machine then give feedback signal.
CH-PA01 adapter module supports Profibus-DP protocol.
2. Service access point
Profibus-DP has access to Profibus data link layer (Layer 2) services through service access
point SAP. Every independent SAP has clearly defined function. Please refer to relevant
Profibus user manual to know more about service access point information.
PROFIDRIVE-Variable speed drive adopts Profibus model or EN50170 standards (Profibus
protocol).
3. Profibus-DP information frame data structures
Profibus-DP bus mode allows rapid data exchange between master station and inverter.
Adopting master-slave mode dealing with inverter access, inverter is always subsidiary
station, and each has definite address. Profibus periodic transmission messages use 16
words (16 bit) transmission, the structure shown in figure1.
Parameters area:
PKW1-Parameter identification
PKW2-array index number
PKW3-parameter value 1
PKW4-parameter value 2
Process data:

262
CW-Control word (from master to slave, see Table 1)
SW-state word (from slave to master, see Table 3)
PZD-process data (decided by users) (From master to slave output 【given value】, from
slave to master input【actual value】)
PZD area (process data area)
PZD area of communication message is designed for control and monitor inverter. PZD from
master and slave station is addressed in high priority; the priority of dealing with PZD is
superior to that of PKW, and always sends current valid date from interface.
Control word (CW) and state word (SW)
Control word (CW) is a basic method of fieldbus system controlling inverter. It is sent by the
fieldbus master station to inverter and the adapter module act as gateway. Inverter responds
according to the control word and gives feedbacks to master machine through state word
(SW).
Contents of control word and state word are shown in table 4.6 and table 4.7 respectively.
Please refer to inverter manual to know bit code.
Given value
Inverter can receive control information by several ways, these channels include: analog and
digital input terminals, inverter control board and module communication (such as RS485,
CH-PA01 adapter modules). In order to use Profibus control inverter, the communication
module must be set to be inverter controller.
Contents of set value are shown in Table 4.6.
Actual value
Actual value is a 16-bit word, which contains converter operation information. Monitoring
capabilities are defined by inverter parameter. The integer scaling of actual value is sent to
master machine depending on selected function, please refer to inverter manual.
Contents of actual values are shown in Table 5.4.
Note: inverter always check the control word (CW) and bytes of given value.
Mission message (From master station to inverter)
Control word (CW)
The first word of PZD is control word (CW) of inverter; due to different control word (CW) of
PWM rectifier regenerative part and inverter part Illustration is depart in next two tables.
Control word (CW) of Goodrive300
Bit Name Value State/Description
0~7 COMMAND BYTE 1 Forward running

263
2 Reverse running
3 Forward jogging
4 Reverse jogging
5 Decelerate to stop
6 Coast to stop (Emergency stop)
7 Fault reset
8 Jogging stop
9 Premagnetizing
8 WIRTE ENABLE
1 Write enable (mainly is PKW1-PKW4 )
9~10
MOTOR GROUP
SELECTION
00 MOTOR GROUP 1 SELECTION
11
TORQUE CONTROL
SELECTION
1 Torque control enable
0 Torque control prohibition
14 RESERVED
1
0
15 HEARTBEAT REF
1 Heartbeat enable
0 Heartbeat prohibition
Reference value (REF):
From 2nd
word to 12th
of PZD task message is the main set value REF, main frequency set
value is offered by main setting signal source. As PWM rectifier feedback part doesn’t have
main frequency setting part, corresponding settings belong to reserved part, the following
table shows inverter part settings for Goodrive300.
Bit Name Function selection
PZD2
receiving
0:Invalid
1:Set frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz))
2:Given PID, range(0 ～ 1000,1000 corresponds to
100.0%)
3:PID feedback, range(0～1000,1000 corresponds to
0
PZD3
receiving
0
PZD4 0

264
receiving 100.0%)
4:Torque set value(-3000~3000,1000 corresponds to
100.0% the rated current of the motor)
5:Set value of the forward rotation upper-limit
frequency(0~Fmax unit:0.01Hz))
6:Set value of the reversed rotation upper-limit
frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz))
7:Electromotion torque upper limit (0~3000,1000
corresponds to 100.0%of the rated current of the motor)
8:Braking torque upper limit (0~2000,1000 corresponds
to 100.0% of the rated current of the motor)
9:Virtual input terminals command
Range:0x000~0x1FF
10:Virtual output terminals command
Range:0x00~0x0F
11:Voltage setting value(specialized for V/F
separation )(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% the
rated voltage of the motor)
12:AO output set value 1(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds
to 100.0%)
13:AO output set value 1(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds
to 100.0%)
PZD5
receiving
0
PZD6
receiving
0
PZD7
receiving
0
PZD8
receiving
0
PZD9
receiving
0
PZD10
receiving
0
PZD11
receiving
0
PZD12
receiving
0
State word (SW):
The first word of PZD response message is state word (SW) of inverter, the definition of state
word is as follows:
State Word (SW) of Goodrive300 (SW)
0~7 RUN STATE BYTE
1 Forward running
2 Reverse running
3 The inverter stops
4 The inverter is in fault
5 The inverter is in POFF state

265
8 DC VOLTAGE ESTABLISH
1 Running ready
0 The running preparation is not ready
9~10
MOTOR GROUP
FEEDBACK
0 Motor 1 feedback
1 Motor 2 feedback
2 Motor 3 feedback
3 Motor 4 no feedback
11 MOTOR TYPE FEEDBACK
1 Synchronous motor
0 Asynchronous motor
12 OVERLOAD ALARM
1 Overload pre-alarm
0 Non-overload pre-alarm
13 FLUX IN EXCITING
1 Exciting
0 Flux establishement
14 RESERVED
1
0
15 HEARTBEAT FEEDBACK
1 Heartbeat feedback
0 No heartbeat feedback
Actual value (ACT):
From 2nd
word to 12th
of PZD task message is main set value ACT, main frequency set value
is offered by main setting signal source.
Actual value of Goodrive300
PZD2
sending
0: Invalid
1:Running frequency(*100, Hz)
2: Set frequency(*100, Hz)
3: Bus voltage(*10, V)
4: Output voltage(*1, V)
5:Output current (*10, A)
6:Output torque actual value(*10, %)
7:Output power actual value
(*10, %)
8:Running rotating speed(*1, RPM)
0
PZD3
sending
0
PZD4
sending
0
PZD5
sending
0
PZD6
sending
0

266
PZD7
sending
9:Running linear speed (*1, m/s)
10:Ramp given frequency
11:Fault code
12:AI1 value (*100, V)
13:AI2 value (*100, V)
14:AI3 value (*100, V)
15:PULSE frequency value (*100,
kHz)
16:Terminals input state
17:Terminals output state
18:PID given (*100, %)
19:PID feedback (*100, %)
20:Motor rated torque
0
PZD8
sending
0
PZD9
sending
0
PZD10
sending
0
PZD11
sending
0
PZD12
sending
0
PKW area (parameter identification marks PKW1-value area). PKW area describes
treatment of parameter identification interface, PKW interface is a mechanism which
determine parameters transmission between two communication partners, such as reading
and writing parameter values.
Structure of PKW area:
Parameter identification zone
In the process of periodic Profibus-DP communication, PKW area is composed of four words
(16 bit), each word is defined as follows:
The first word PKW1 (16 bit)
Bit 15~00 Task or response identification marks 0~7
The second word PKW2 (16 bit)
Bit 15~00 Basic parameters address 0~247
The third word PKW3 (16 bit)
Bit 15~00
Parameter value (high word) or return error
code value
00

267
The fourth word PKW4 (16 bit)
Bit 15~00 Parameter value (low word) 0~65535
Note: If the master requests one parameter value, the value of PKW3 and PKW4 will not be
valid.
Task requests and responses
When passing data to slave machine, master machine use request label while slave
machine use response label to positive or negative confirmation. Table 5.5 and Table 5.6 list
the request/response functional.
The definition of task logo PKW1 is as follows:
Definition of task logo PKW1
Request label (From master to slave) Response label
Request Function
Positive
confirmation
Negative
confirmation
0 No task 0 －
1 Request parameter value 1,2 3
2
Modification parameter value (one word) [only
change RAM]
1 3 or 4
3
Modification parameter value (double word) [only
change RAM]
2 3 or 4
4
Modification parameter value (one word) [RAM
and EEPROM are modified]
1 3 or 4
5
Modification parameter value (double word)
[RAM and EEPROM are modified]
2 3 or 4
Request label
"2"-modification parameter value (one word) [only change RAM],
"3"-modification parameter value (double word) [only change RAM]
"5"-modification parameter value (double word) [RAM and EPROM are modified] not
support.
Reponses logo PKW1 defines as below:
Response label (From slave to master)
Confirmation Function
0 No response
1 Transmission parameter value ( one word)

268
Response label (From slave to master)
Confirmation Function
2 Transmission parameter value ( two word)
3
Task can not be executed and returns the following error number:
0: Illegal parameter number
1: Parameter values can not be changed (read-only parameter)
2: Out of set value range
3: The sub-index number is not correct
4: Setting is not allowed (only reset)
5: Data type is invalid
6: The task could not be implemented due to operational state
7: Request isn’t supported.
8: Request can’t be completed due to communication error
9: Fault occurs when write operation to stationary store
10: Request fails due to timeout
11: Parameter can not be assigned to PZD
12: Control word bit can’t be allocated
13: Other errors
4 No parameter change rights
Example 1: Read parameter value
Read keypad set frequency value (the address of keypad set frequency is 4) which can be
achieved by setting PKW1 as 1, PKW2 as 4, return value is in PKW4.
Request (From master to inverter):
Requst
PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 PZD12
00 01 00 04 00 00 00 xx
···
···xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
0004: Parameter address
0001 Request read parameter
00
Response (From inverter to master)
Response
00 01 00 04 00 00 50 xx
···
0001: Reponse (Parameter values refreshed)
00
5000: Address 4 parameter
Example 2: Modify the parameter values (RAM and EEPROM are modified)

269
Modify keypad settings frequency value (the address of keypad set frequency is 4) which
can be achieved by setting PKW1 as 2; PKW2 as 4, modification value (50.00) is in PKW4.
Requst
00 02 00 04 00 00 50 xx
···
0004: Parameter changes
00
5000: Address 4 parameter
Response (From inverter to master)
Response
00 01 00 04 00 00 50 xx
···
0001: Response (Parameter values refreshed)
00
Example for PZD:
Transmission of PZD area is achieved through inverter function code; please refer to
relevant INVT inverter user manual to know relevant function code.
Example 1: Read process data of inverter
Inverter parameter selects "8: Run frequency" as PZD3 to transmit which can be achieved
by setting Pd.14 as 8. This operation is mandatory until the parameter is instead of others.
PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 … PZD12
Response xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 0A … xx xx
Example 2: Write process data into inverter
Inverter parameter selects "2”: Traction given" from PZD3 which can be achieved by setting
Pd.03 as 2. In each request frame, parameters will use PZD3 to update until re-select a
parameter.
Request (From master to converter):
PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 … PZD12
Response xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 00 … xx xx
In each request frame contents of PZD3 are given by traction until re-select a parameter.
A.2.9 Fault information
CH-PA01 module is equipped with three fault display LEDs as shown is figure below. The
roles of these LEDs are as follows:

270
Fault display LEDs
LED No. Name Color Function
1
Main
display
Green ON--Connection works
Red
ON-Connection lost for ever
Flashes- Connection lost for temporary
2 Online Green
ON-module online and data can be exchanged.
OFF-module is not in "online" state.
3 Offline Red
ON-module offline and data can’t be exchanged.
OFF-module is not in "offline" state.
4 Fault Red
1. Flicker frequency 1Hz-configuration error: The length of
user parameter data sets is different from that of network
configuration process during module initialization process.
2. Flicker frequency 2Hz-user parameter data error: The
length or content of user parameter data sets is different
from that of network configuration process during module
initialization process.
3. Flicker frequency 4Hz-Profibus communication ASIC
initialization error.
4. OFF-Diagnostic closed.

Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B
271
Technical data Appendix B
B.1 What this chapter contains
This chapter contains the technical specifications of the inverter, as well as provisions for
fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks.
B.2 Ratings
B.2.1 Capacity
Inverter sizing is based on the rated motor current and power. To achieve the rated motor
power given in the table, the rated current of the inverter must be higher than or equal to the
rated motor current. Also the rated power of the inverter must be higher than or equal to the
rated motor power. The power ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within
one voltage range.
Note:
1. The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · PN. If the limit is exceeded,
motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge
of the drive against overload.
2. The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C
3. It is important to check that in Common DC systems the power flowing through the
common DC connection does not exceed PN.
B.2.2 Derating
The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C, the
altitude exceeds 1000 metersor the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or
15 kHz.
B.2.2.1 Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C, the rated output current is decreased by 3% for
every additional 1 °C. Refer to the below list for the actual derating.

272
B.2.2.2 Altitude derating
The device can output rated power if the installation site below 1000m. The output power
decreases if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters. Below is the detailed decreasing range of the
derating:
For 3-phase 200 V drives, the maximum altitude is 3000 m above sea level. In altitudes
2000…3000 m, the derating is 2% for every 100 m.
B.2.2.3 Carrier frequency derating
For Goodrive300 series inverters, different power level corresponds to different carrier
frequency range. The rated power of the inverter is based on the factory carrier frequency,
so if it is above the factory value, the inverter needs to derate 20% for every additional 1 kHz
carrier frequency.
B.3 Electric power network specification
Voltage
AC 3PH 400V±15%
AC 3PH 220V±10%
AC 3PH 660V±10%
Short-circuit Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input

273
capacity power connection as defined in IEC 60439-1 is 100 kA. The drive is
suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100
kA at the drive maximum rated voltage.
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 20%/s
B.4 Motor connection data
Motor type
Asynchronous induction motor or synchronous permanent magnet
motor
Voltage 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Short-circuit
protection
The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1
Frequency 0...400 Hz
Frequency
resolution
0.01 Hz
Current Refer to Ratings
Power limit 1.5 · PN
Field weakening
point
10...400 Hz
Carrier frequency 4, 8, 12 or 15 kHz（in scalar control）
B.4.1 EMC compatibility and motor cable length
To comply with the European EMC Directive (standard IEC/EN 61800-3), use the following
maximum motor cable lengths for 4 kHz switching frequency.
All frame sizes Maximum motor cable length, 4 kHz
With internal EMC filter
Second environment (category C3) 30
first environment (category C2) 30
Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive’s operational factors. Contact your
local INVT representative for the exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters.
B.5 Applicable standards
The inverter complies with the following standards:
EN ISO 13849-1: 2008
Safety of machinery-safety related parts of control systems -
Part 1: general principles for design
IEC/EN 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part

274
1: General requirements.
IEC/EN 62061: 2005
Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related
electrical,electronic and programmable electronic control
systems
IEC/EN 61800-3:2004
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test methods
IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-1:
Safety requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy
IEC/EN 61800-5-2:2007
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-2:
Safety requirements. Functional.
B.5.1 CE marking
The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the
European Low Voltage and EMC Directives.
B.5.2 Compliance with the European EMC Directive
The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3:2004)
covers requirements stated for drives. See section EMC regulations
B.6 EMC regulations
EMC product standard (EN 61800-3:2004) contains the EMC requirements to the inverter.
First environment: domestic environment (includes establishments connected to a
low-voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes).
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying
domestic premises.
Four categories of the inverter:
Inverter of category C1: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V and used in the first
environment.
Inverter of category C2: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V other than pins, sockets
and motion devices and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional
electrican when used in the first environment.
Note: IEC/EN 61800-3 in EMC standard doesn’t limit the power distribution of the inverter,
but it defines the ustage, installation and commission. The professional electrician has
necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC
aspects.

275
Inverter of category C3: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V and used in the second
environment other than the first one
Inverter of category C4: inverter of rated voltage more than 1000 V or the nomninal current is
above or equal to 400A and used in the complicated system in second environment
B.6.1 Category C2
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the options and installed as specified in
the EMC filter manual.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see EMC
compatibility and motor cable length
²In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
B.6.2 Category C3
The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC/EN 61800-3,
second environment.
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the options and installed as specified in
the EMC filter manual.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see EMC
compatibility and motor cable length
²A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage
public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency
interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.

Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C
276
Dimension drawings Appendix C
C.1 What this chapter contains
Dimension drawings of the Goodrive300 are shown below. The dimensions are given in
millimeters andinches.
C.2 Keypad structure
C.2.1 Structure chart
C.2.2 Installaiton chart

277
C.3 Inverter chart
C.4 Inverter chart
C.4.1 Goodrive300 series 1.5kW-2.2kW (unit: mm)
C.4.2 Goodrive300 series 4kW-5.5kW (unit: mm)

278
C.4.3 Goodrive300 series 7.5kW-11kW (unit: mm)
C.4.4 Goodrive300 series 15kW-18.5kW (unit: mm)
C.4.5 Goodrive300 series 22kW-30kW (unit: mm)
RUN/TUNE FWD/REV LOCAL/REMOT TRIP
HZ
A
V
RPM
%
PRG
ESC
DATA
ENT
QUICK
JOG SHIFT
STOP
RSTRUN
RUN/TUNE FWD/REV LOCAL/REMOT TRIP
HZ
A
V
RPM
%
PRG
ESC
DATA
ENT
QUICK
JOG SHIFT
STOP
RSTRUN

279
WARNING
Read the manual before
installing and commissioning
Touch currentmay be over 3.5mA.
Must use proper grounding techniques
Risk of electric shock
Wait at least 15 minutes after
disconnecting power supply before
proceeding
警告
安装，调试前务必阅读
使用说明书
接触电流高于3.5mA，务必
采取可靠接地措施。
有触电，受伤危险
断电之后，至少等待十五分
钟后再进行操作。
WARNING
Read the manual before
installing and commissioning
Touch current may be over 3.5mA.
Must use proper grounding techniques
Risk of electric shock
Wait at least 15 minutes after
disconnecting power supply before
proceeding
警告
安装，调试前务必阅读
使用说明书
接触电流高于3.5mA，务必
采取可靠接地措施。
有触电，受伤危险
断电之后，至少等待十五分
钟后再进行操作。

280
C.4.9 Dimension chart
Type W1 W2 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 H1 H2 H3 H4
Installation
hole
1.5kW-2.2kW 126 115 175 —— —— —— —— 170 70.5 6.5 3 5
4kW-5.5kW 146 131 262.9 246 —— 5 —— 180.9 81 7 4 6
7.5kW-11kW 170 151 331.5 306 —— 7 —— 216.2 115 6.5 3 6
15kW-18.5kW 230 210 341.9 311 —— —— 9.5 216.2 110 6.5 3 6
22kW-30kW 255 237 406.8 384 —— —— 8 243.5 121 10 4 7
37kW-55kW 270 130 535 520 490 9 7 315 162 2 2 7
75kW-110kW 325 200 680 661 620 11 8 365 184 2.5 2.5 9.5
132kW-200kW 500 360 845 —— —— 14 —— 360 180.5 2.5 2.5 11
Note:
1. L2 and L4 of 4kW-5.5kW inverter and 7.5kW-11kW inverter is different.
Type
Wall installation（mm） Cabine installation（mm）
L2 L4 L2 L4
4kW-5.5kW 243.5 7.5 246 5
7.5kW-11kW 303.5 9.5 306 7
2. The installation of wall installation and cabinet installation of other models are the same.

Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D
281
Peripherial options and parts Appendix D
D.1 What this chapter contains What this chapter contain
This chapter describes how to select the options and parts of Goodrive300 series.
D.2 Peripherial wiring
Below is the peripherial wiring of Goodrive300 series inverters.
Note:
1． The inverter below 30kW (including 30kW) are embedded with braking unit.
2. Only the inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) have P1 terminal and are connected
with DC reators.
3. The braking units apply standard braking unit DBU series in. Refer to the instruction of
DBU for detailed information.
Pictures Name Descriptions
Cables Device to transfer the electronic signals

282
Pictures Name Descriptions
Cables Device to transfer the electronic signals
Breaker
Prevent from electric shock and protect the
power supply and the cables system from
overcurrent when short circuits occur.
(Please select the breaker with the
function of reducing high order harmonic
and the rated sensitive current to 1 inverter
should be above 30mA).
Input reactor
This device is used to improve the power
factor of the input side of the inverter and
control the higher harmonic current.
The inverter above 37kW (including 37kW)
can be connected with DC reactor.
DC reactor
Input filter
Control the electromagnetic interference
generated from the inverter, please install
close to the input terminal side of the
inverter.
or
Braking unit or resistors
Shorten the DEC time
The inverters below 30kW(including 30kW)
only need braking resistors and the
inverters above 37kW(including 37 kW)
need braking units
Output filter
Control the interference from the output
side of the inverter and please install close
to the output terminals of the inverter.
Output reactor
Prolong the effective transimiting distance
of the inverter to control the sudden high
voltage when switchiong on/off the IGBT of
the inverter.
D.3 Power supply
Please refer to Electronical Installation.

283
²Check that the voltage degree of the inverter complies with the voltage
of the supply power voltage.
D.4 Cables
D.4.1 Power cables
Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations.
• The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load
currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C maximum permissible temperature of the
conductor in continuous use.
• The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor
(same cross-sectional area).
• Refer to chapter Technical Data for the EMC requirements.
A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the figure below) must be used to meet the EMC
requirements of the CE.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical cable is
recommended. Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded
cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing
currents and wear.
Note: A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity of the cable shield is not
sufficient for the purpose.
To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional area as
the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal.
To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield
conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The requirements are
easily met with a copper or aluminum shield. The minimum requirement of the motor cable
shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires. The
better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and bearing currents.

284
D.4.2 Control cables
All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded. Use a
double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a) for analog signals. Employ one individually
shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for different analog signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a
single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable. However, for
frequency input, always use a shielded cable.
Note: Run analog and digital signals in separate cables.
The relay cable needs the cable type with braided metallic screen.
The keypad needs to connect with cables. It is recommended to use the screen cable on
complex electrical magnetic condition.
Note: Run analog and digital signals in separate cables.
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example hi-pot or
megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been
tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are
voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.
Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.
The inverter
Recommended
cable size（mm2
）
Connecting cable size（mm2
）
Terminal
screw
size
Tightening
torque
（Nm）
RST
UVW
PE
RST
UVW
P1 and
（+）
PB
（+）
and （-）
PE
GD300-1R5G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD300-2R2G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD300-004G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5

285
The inverter
Recommended
cable size（mm2
）
Connecting cable size（mm2
）
Terminal
screw
size
Tightening
torque
（Nm）
RST
UVW
PE
RST
UVW
P1 and
（+）
PB
（+）
and （-）
PE
GD300-5R5G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~16 4~16 4~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD300-7R5G-4 4 4 2.5~16 4~16 4~6 2.5~6 M5 2-~2.5
GD300-011G-4 6 6 6~16 6~16 6~10 6~10 M5 2-~2.5
GD300-015G/-4 10 10 10~16 6~16 6~10 6~16 M5 2-~2.5
GD300-018G-4 16 16 16~25 16~25 6~10 10~16 M5 2-~2.5
GD300-022G-4 16 16 10~16 16~35 10~16 10~16 M6 4~6
GD300-030G-4 25 16 16~25 16~35 16~25 16~25 M6 4~6
GD300-037G-4 25 16 25~50 25~50 16~50 16~25 M8 9~11
GD300-045G-4 35 16 25~50 25~50 25~50 16~25 M8 9~11
GD300-055G-4 50 25 35~95 50~95 25~95 25 M8 9~11
GD300-075G-4 70 35 70~95 35~95 50~75 25~35 M10 18~23
GD300-090G-4 95 50 35~95 35~150 25~70 50~150 M10 18~23
GD300-110G-4 120 70 95~300 70~300 35~300 70~240 M10 18~23
GD300-132G-4 185 95 95~300 70~300 35~300 95~240 M12 32~40
GD300-160G-4 240 120 95~300 95~300 70~300 120~240 M12 32~40
GD300-200G-4 95*2P 95 95~150 70~150 70~150 35~95 M12 32~40
GD300-220G-4 150*2P 150 95~150 70~150 70~150 50~150
GD300-250G-4 95*4P 95*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 60~150
GD300-280G-4 95*4P 95*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150
GD300-315G-4 150*4P 150*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150
GD300-350G-4 150*4P 150*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150
GD300-400G-4 150*4P 150*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150
GD300-500G-4 —— —— —— —— —— ——
Note:
1. It is appropriate to use the recommended cable size under 40℃ and rated current. The
wiring distance should be no more than 100m..
2. Terminals P1, (+), PB and (-) connects the DC reactor options and parts.

286
D.4.3 Routing the cables
Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives can be
run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor cable, input
power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid long parallel runs of
motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid
changes in the drive output voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle
as near to 90 degrees as possible.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding
electrodes. Aluminum tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential.
A figure of the cable routing is shown below.
D.4.4 Checking the insulation
Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive
output terminals U, V and W.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective
Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC. For the insulation resistance of
other motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is
suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement.
D.5 Breaker and electromagnetic contactor
It is necessary to add fuse for the avoidance of overload.
It is appropriate to use a breaker (MCCB)which complies with the inverter power in the
3-phase AC power and input power and terminals (R,S,T). The capacity of the inverter
should be 1.5-2 times of the rated current.

287
²Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit
breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may
escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure
safe use, special attention must be paid to the installation and
placement of the breakers. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
It is necessary to install the electromagnetic contactor in the input side to control the
switching on and off safety of the main circuit. It can switch off the input power supply when
syatem fault.
The inverter Breaker （A）
Breaker
（A）
The rated working
current of the contactor
（A）
GD300-1R5G-4 15 16 10
GD300-2R2G-4 17.4 16 10
GD300-004G-4 30 25 16
GD300-5R5G-4 45 25 16
GD300-7R5G-4 60 40 25
GD300-011G-4 78 63 32
GD300-015G/-4 105 63 50
GD300-018G-4 114 100 63
GD300-022G-4 138 100 80
GD300-030G-4 186 125 95
GD300-037G-4 228 160 120
GD300-045G-4 270 200 135
GD300-055G-4 315 200 170
GD300-075G-4 420 250 230
GD300-090G-4 480 315 280
GD300-110G-4 630 400 315
GD300-132G-4 720 400 380
GD300-160G-4 870 630 450
GD300-200G-4 1110 630 580
GD300-220G-4 1230 800 630
GD300-250G-4 1380 800 700
GD300-280G-4 1500 1000 780

288
The inverter Breaker （A）
Breaker
（A）
The rated working
current of the contactor
（A）
GD300-315G-4 1740 1200 900
GD300-350G-4 1860 1280 960
GD300-400G-4 2010 1380 1035
GD300-500G-4 2505 1720 1290
D.6 Reactors
High current in the input power circuit may cause damage to the rectifying components. It is
appropriate to use AC reactor in the input side for the avoidance of high-voltage input of the
power supply and improvement of the power factors.
If the distance between the inverter and the motor is longer than 50m, frequent overcurrent
protection may occur to the inverter because of high leakage current caused by parasitic
capacitance effects from the long cables to the ground. In order to avoid the damage of the
motor insulation, it is necessary to add reactor compensation.
All the inverters above 37kW (including 37kW)are equipped with internal DC reactors for the
improvement of power factors and the avoidance of damage from high input current to the
rectifying components because of the high-capacity transformer. The device can also cease
the damage to the rectifying components which are caused by supply net voltage transients
and harmonic waves of the loads.
The power of the inverter Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor
GD300-1R5G-4 ACL2-1R5-4 / OCL2-1R5-4
GD300-2R2G-4 ACL2-2R2-4 / OCL2-2R2-4
GD300-004G-4 ACL2-004-4 / OCL2-004-4
GD300-5R5G-4 ACL2-5R5-4 / OCL2-5R5-4

289
The power of the inverter Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor
GD300-7R5G-4 ACL2-7R5-4 / OCL2-7R5-4
GD300-011G-4 ACL2-011-4 / OCL2-011-4
GD300-015G/-4 ACL2-015-4 / OCL2-015-4
GD300-018G-4 ACL2-018-4 / OCL2-018-4
GD300-022G-4 ACL2-022-4 / OCL2-022-4
GD300-030G-4 ACL2-030-4 / OCL2-030-4
GD300-037G-4 ACL2-037-4 DCL2-037-4 OCL2-037-4
GD300-045G-4 ACL2-045-4 DCL2-045-4 OCL2-045-4
GD300-055G-4 ACL2-055-4 DCL2-055-4 OCL2-055-4
GD300-075G-4 ACL2-075-4 DCL2-075-4 OCL2-075-4
GD300-090G-4 ACL2-090-4 DCL2-090-4 OCL2-090-4
GD300-110G-4 ACL2-110-4 DCL2-110-4 OCL2-110-4
GD300-132G-4 ACL2-132-4 DCL2-132-4 OCL2-132-4
GD300-160G-4 ACL2-160-4 DCL2-160-4 OCL2-160-4
GD300-200G-4 ACL2-200-4 DCL2-200-4 OCL2-200-4
GD300-220G-4 ACL2-250-4 DCL2-250-4 OCL2-250-4
GD300-250G-4 ACL2-250-4 DCL2-250-4 OCL2-250-4
GD300-280G-4 ACL2-280-4 DCL2-280-4 OCL2-280-4
GD300-315G-4 ACL2-315-4 DCL2-315-4 OCL2-315-4
GD300-350G-4 ACL2-350-4 DCL2-350-4 OCL2-350-4
GD300-400G-4 ACL2-400-4 DCL2-400-4 OCL2-400-4
GD300-500G-4 ACL2-500-4 DCL2-500-4 OCL2-500-4
Note:
1. The rated derate voltage of the input reactor is 2%±15%.
2. The power factor of the input side is above 90% after adding DC reactor.
3. The rated derate voltage of the output reactor is 1%±15%.
4. Above options are external, the customer should indicate when purchasing.
D.7 Filter
Goodrive300 series inverters have embedded C3 filters which can be connected by J10.

290
The input interference filter can decrease the interference of the inverter to the surrounding
equipments.
Output interference filter can decrease the radio noise cause by the cables between the
inverter and the motor and the leakage current of the conducting wires.
Our company configured some filters for the convenient of the users.
D.7.1 Filter type instruction
Character
designation
Detailed instruction
A FLT:inverter filter seriee
B
Filter type
P:power supply filter
C
Voltage degree
S2:signle phase 220Vac
04:3-phase 380Vac
D 3 bit rated current code “015” means 15A
E
Installation type
L: Common type
H: High performance type
F
Utilization environment of the filters
A:the first envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C1 (EN
61800-3:2004)
B:the first envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C2 (EN
61800-3:2004)

291
Character
designation
Detailed instruction
C:the second envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C3 (EN
61800-3:2004)
D.7.2 Filters selection table
The inverter Input filter Output filter
GD300-1R5G-4
FLT-P04006L-B FLT-L04006D
GD300-2R2G-4
GD300-004G-4 FLT-P04016L-B FLT- L04014D
GD300-5R5G-4
FLT-P04032L-B FLT- L04032DGD300-7R5G-4
GD300-011G-4
GD300-015G/-4 FLT-P04045L-B FLT- L04049D
GD300-018G-4
FLT-P04065L-B FLT- L04075D
GD300-022G-4
GD300-030G-4
FLT-P04150L-B FLT- L04150DGD300-037G-4
GD300-045G-4
GD300-055G-4
FLT-P04240L-B FLT- L04250DGD300-075G-4
GD300-090G-4
Note:
1. The input EMI meet the requirement of C2 after adding input filters.
2. Above options are external, the customer should indicate when purchasing.
D.8 Braking system
D.8.1 Select the braking components
It is appropriate to use braking resistor or braking unit when the motor brakes sharply or the
motor is driven by a high inertia load. The motor will become a generator if its actual rotating
speed is higher than the corresponding speed of the reference frequency. As a result, the
inertial energy of the motor and load return to the inverter to charge the capacitors in the
main DC circuit. When the voltage increases to the limit, damage may occur to the inverter. It

292
is necessary to apply braking unit/resistor to avoid this accident happens.
²Only qualified electricians are allowed to design, install, commission
and operate on the inverter.
²Follow the instructions in “warning” during working. Physical injury or
death or serious property may occur.
²Only qualified electricians are allowed to wire. Damage to the inverter
or braking options and part may occur. Read carefully the instructions
of braking resistors or units before connecting them with the inverter.
²Do not connect the braking resistor with other terminals except for PB
and（-）. Do not connect the braking unit with other terminals except for
（+）and（-）.Damage to the inverter or braking circuit or fire may occur.
²Connect the braking resistor or braking unit with the inverter according
to the diagram. Incorrect wiring may cause damage to the inverter or
other devices.
Goodrive300 series inverters below 30kW (including 30kW) need internal braking units and
the inverters above 37kW need external braking unit. Please select the resistence and
power of the braking resistors according to actual utilization.
Type Braking unit type
100% of
braking
rate（Ω）
The cousumped power of the
braking resistor
Mini
Braking
Resistor
（Ω）
10%
braking
50%
braking
80%
braking
GD300-1R5G-4
Internal braking
unit
426.7 0.225 1.125 1.8 170
GD300-2R2G-4 290.9 0.33 1.65 2.64 130
GD300-004G-4 160.0 0.6 3 4.8 80
GD300-5R5G-4 116.4 0.75 4.125 6.6 60
GD300-7R5G-4 85.3 1.125 5.625 9 47
GD300-011G-4 58.2 1.65 8.25 13.2 31
GD300-015G-4 42.7 2.25 11.25 18 23
GD300-018G-4 35.6 3 13.5 21.6 19
GD300-022G-4 29.1 3.75 16.5 26.4 16
GD300-030G-4 21.3 4.5 22.5 36 9
GD300-037G-4 DBU100H-060-4 13.2 6 28 44 11.7
GD300-045G-4 DBU100H-110-4 10.9 7 34 54 6.4

293
Type Braking unit type
100% of
braking
rate（Ω）
The cousumped power of the
braking resistor
Mini
Braking
Resistor
（Ω）
10%
braking
50%
braking
80%
braking
GD300-055G-4 8.9 8 41 66
GD300-075G-4 6.5 11 56 90
ID300-090G-4
DBU100H-160-4
5.4 14 68 108
4.4
GD300-110G-4 4.5 17 83 132
GD300-132G-4 DBU100H-220-4 3.7 20 99 158 3.2
GD300-160G-4
DBU100H-320-4
3.1 24 120 192
2.2
GD300-200G-4 2.5 30 150 240
GD300-220G-4
DBU100H-400-4
2.2 33 165 264
1.8
GD300-250G-4 2.0 38 188 300
GD300-280G-4
Two
DBU100H-320-4
3.6*2 21*2 105*2 168*2
2.2*2
GD300-315G-4 3.2*2 24*2 118*2 189*2
GD300-350G-4 2.8*2 27*2 132*2 210*2
GD300-400G-4 2.4*2 30*2 150*2 240*2
GD300-500G-4
Two
DBU100H-400-4
2*2 38*2 186*2 300*2 1.8*2
Note:
Select the resistor and power of the braking unit according to the data our company
provided.
The braking resistor may increase the braking torque of the inverter. The resistor power in
the above table is designed on 100% braking torque and 10% braking usage ratio. If the
users need more braking torque, the braking resistor can decrease properly and the power
needs to be magnified.
When using the external braking units, please see the instructions of the energy braking
units to set the voltage degree of the braking unit. Incorrect voltage degree may affect the
normal running of the inverter.
²Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value
specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are
not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.

294
²Increase the power of the braking resistor properly in the frequent
braking situation (the frequency usage ratio is more than 10%).
D.8.2 Selecting the brake resistor cables
Use a shielded cable to the resistor cable.
D.8.3 Placing the brake resistor
Install all resistors in a place where they will cool.
²The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The
surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor
is of hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact.
Installation of the braking resistor:
²The inverters below30kW (including 30kW) only needs external braking
resistors.
²PB and（+）are the wiring terminals of the braking resistors.
Installation of braking units:
²The inverters above 37kW (including 370kW) only needs external
braking units.
²(+),(-) are the wiring terminals of the braking units.
²The wiring length between the (+),(-) terminals of the inverter and the
(+),(-) terminals of the braking units should be no more than 5m,and the
distributing length among BR1 and BR2 and the braking resistor
terminals should be no more than 10m.
Signal installation is as below:

Goodrive300 inverters Appendix E
295
Further information Appendix E
E.1.1 Product and service inquirie
Address any inquiries about the product to your local INVT offices, quoting the type
designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of INVT sales, support and
service contacts can be found by navigating to www.invt.com.cn.
E.1.2 Providing feedback on INVT Inverters manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.invt.com.cn and select Online
Feedback of Contact Us.
E.1.3 Document library on the Internet
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to
www.invt.com.cn and select Service and Support of Document Download.

Gd300 user manual v1.1

More Related Content

Viewers also liked (7)

Similar to Gd300 user manual v1.1 (20)

More from Toàn Huỳnh (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Gd300 user manual v1.1